infiniti g37-09-coupe2

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

C

D

E

SECTION BRMA

B

BODY REPAIR

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

RM

N

O

P

CONTENTS

B

VEHICLE INFORMATION ............................. 2

BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR ..................... 2Body Exterior Paint Color .......................................2

PRECAUTION ............................................... 3

REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL .............. 3High Strength Steel (HSS) ......................................3

PREPARATION ............................................ 6

REPAIRING MATERIAL ..................................... 6Foam Repair .............................................................6

BODY COMPONENT PARTS ............................. 8Underbody Component Parts ..................................8Body Component Parts ...........................................10

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............12

CORROSION PROTECTION .............................12Description ..............................................................12Anti-corrosive Wax ..................................................12Undercoating (2WD) ...............................................13Undercoating (AWD) ...............................................14Body Sealing (2WD) ................................................15Body Sealing (AWD) ...............................................18

BODY CONSTRUCTION ....................................22Body Construction ...................................................22Rear Fender Hemming Process ..............................23

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS ........................25Description ..............................................................25

Radiator Core Support .............................................27Hoodledge ...............................................................27Front Side Member (2WD) ......................................30Front Side Member (AWD) ......................................33Front Side Member (Partial Replacement) ...........35Front Pillar ..............................................................36Outer Sill .................................................................39Rear Fender ............................................................42Lock Pillar Reinforcement ........................................44Lock Pillar Reinforcement (Partial Replacement) ....45Outer Wheelhouse ...................................................46Rear Panel ..............................................................48Rear Floor Rear .....................................................48Rear Side Member Extension (2WD) ......................49Rear Side Member Extension (AWD) ......................50

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................52

BODY ALIGNMENT ..........................................52Body Center Marks ................................................52Description ...............................................................53Engine Compartment (2WD) ...................................53Engine Compartment (AWD) ...................................55Underbody (2WD) ....................................................57Underbody (AWD) ...................................................60Passenger Compartment ........................................63Rear Body ...............................................................64

LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS ....................67Precautions for Plastics ...........................................67Location of Plastic Parts ..........................................68

BRM-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR
< VEHICLE INFORMATION >
VEHICLE INFORMATIONBODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR

Body Exterior Paint Color INFOID:0000000004249889

NOTE:

• 2S: Solid + Clear

• CS: Color clear solid

• M: Metallic

• P: 2-Coat pearl

• 3P: 3-Coat pearl

• FPM: Iron oxide pearl

• RPM: Multi flex color

• TPM: Titanium pearl metallic

• TM: Micro titanium metallic

• PM: Pearl metallic

Component

Color code BA54 BB21 BKH3 BK23 BK51 BK52 BK57 BQAA

Description Red Blue Black Silver GrayDark Gray

Gray White

Paint type Note CS PM 2S M M PM TPM 3P

Anti scratch advanced paint

× × × × × × × ×

1 Bumper fascia Body color BA54 BB21 BKH3 BK23 BK51 BK52 BK57 BQAA

2 Front grilleChromium plate

Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr

3 Front pillar finisher Body color BA54 BB21 BKH3 BK23 BK51 BK52 BK57 BQAA

4Door out-side mirror

Cover Body color BA54 BB21 BKH3 BK23 BK51 BK52 BK57 BQAA

5 Trunk lid finisher Body color BA54 BB21 BKH3 BK23 BK51 BK52 BK57 BQAA

6Satellite radio an-tenna

Body color BA54 BB21 BKH3 BK23 BK51 BK52 BK57 BQAA

7 Fuel filler lid Body color BA54 BB21 BKH3 BK23 BK51 BK52 BK57 BQAA

8 Door outside handle Body color BA54 BB21 BKH3 BK23 BK51 BK52 BK57 BQAA

9 Center mudguard Body color BA54 BB21 BKH3 BK23 BK51 BK52 BK57 BQAA

JSKIA0361GB


REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

B

PRECAUTIONREPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL

High Strength Steel (HSS) INFOID:0000000004249904

High strength steel is used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle weight.Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength steel are described below:

Read the following precautions when repairing HSS:1. Additional points to consider

• The repair of reinforcements (such as side members) by heat-ing is not recommended, because it may weaken the compo-nent. When heating is unavoidable, never heat HSS partsabove 550°C (1,022°F).Verify heating temperature with a thermometer.(Crayon-type and other similar type thermometer are appropri-ate.)

Tensile strength Major applicable parts

370 - 590 MPa

• Front strut housing• Hoodledge reinforcement• Lower dash crossmember assembly• Lower dash• Upper front pillar reinforcement• Trans control reinforcement

(Center front floor component part)• 2nd and 3rd crossmember

(Front floor component part)• Inner sill• Outer sill reinforcement• Outer lock pillar reinforcement• Upper outer rear wheelhouse extension• Front side member assembly• Front side member closing plate assembly• Front side member outrigger assembly• Rear side member assembly• Outer door panel• Trunk lid• Other reinforcements

780 - 1350 MPa

• Front side member stiffener(Front floor component part)

• Upper inner lock pillar reinforcement(Outer lock pillar reinforcement component part)

• Outer rear sill reinforcement(Lower outer rear wheelhouse extension component part)

PIIA0115E


< PRECAUTION >
• When straightening body panels, use caution in pulling anyHSS panel. Because HSS is very strong, pulling may causedeformation in adjacent sections of the body. In this case,increase the number of measuring points, and carefully pullthe HSS panel.

• When cutting HSS panels, avoid gas (torch) cutting if possible.Instead, use a saw to avoid weakening surrounding areas dueto heat. If gas (torch) cutting is unavoidable, allow a minimummargin of 50 mm (1.97in).

• When welding HSS panels, use spot welding whenever possi-ble in order to minimize weakening surrounding areas due toheat.If spot welding is impossible, use MIG. welding. Do not usegas (torch) for welding because it is inferior in weldingstrength.

• Spot welding on HSS panels is harder than that of an ordinarysteel panel.Therefore, when cutting spot welds on a HSS panel, use a lowspeed high torque drill (1,000 to 1,200 rpm) to increase drill bitdurability and facilitate the operation.

PIIA0116E

PIIA0117E

JSKIA0082GB

PIIA0145E



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

B

2. Precautions in spot welding HSSThis work should be performed under standard working condi-tions. Always note the following when spot welding HSS:• The electrode tip diameter must be sized properly according to

the metal thickness.

• The panel surfaces must fit flush to each other, leaving nogaps.

• Follow the specifications for the proper welding pitch.Unit: mm (in)

PIIA0146E

PIIA0147E

Thickness (T) Minimum pitch (L)

0.6 (0.024)0.8 (0.031)1.0 (0.039)1.2 (0.047)1.6 (0.063)1.8 (0.071)

10 (0.39) or over12 (0.47) or over18 (0.71) or over20 (0.79) or over27 (1.06) or over31 (1.22) or over

JSKIA0781ZZ


REPAIRING MATERIAL
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATIONREPAIRING MATERIAL

Foam Repair INFOID:0000000004684823

During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around thevehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators.

URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONSUse commercially available Urethane foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle.

Read instructions on product for fill procedures.

Example of foaming agent filling operation procedure

1. Fill procedures after installation of service part.a. Eliminate foam material remaining on vehicle side.b. Clean area after eliminating form insulator and foam material.c. Install service part.d. Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill enough to close gap with the service part.

2. Fill procedures before installation of service part.a. Eliminate foam material remaining on vehicle side.b. Clean area after eliminating foam insulator and foam material.c. Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side.

<Urethane foam for foaming agent> 3M™ Automix™ Flexible Foam 08463 or equiva-lent

1. Urethane foam

A. Nozzle insert hole

: Vehicle front

JSKIA0129GB


REPAIRING MATERIAL

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P

< PREPARATION >

B

NOTE:Fill enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flangearea.

d. Install service part.NOTE:Refer to label for information on working times.

1. Urethane foam

A. Fill while avoiding flange area

: Vehicle front

JSKIA0130GB


BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION >

Underbody Component Parts INFOID:0000000004249891

1. Radiator core support assembly (RH & LH)

2. Front strut housing (RH & LH) 3. Lower rear hoodledge (RH & LH)

4. Upper front hoodledge (RH & LH) 5. Upper rear hoodledge (RH & LH) 6. Hoodledge reinforcement (RH & LH)

JSKIA0878ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P

< PREPARATION >

B

NOTE:

For the parts without a number described in the figure, it is supplied only with the assembly part that the part is included with.

7. Upper side cowl top (RH & LH) 8. Upper front cowl top assembly 9. Cowl top bracket

10. Upper dash 11. Lower dash crossmember assembly 12. Lower outer battery support bracket

13. Lower battery support bracket 14. Lower dash 15. Center front floor

16. Front floor (RH & LH) 17. Inner sill (RH & LH) 18. Rear seat crossmember reinforce-ment assembly

19. Rear floor front 20. Rear floor seat belt anchor reinforce-ment

21. Rear floor rear

22. Spare tire clamp bracket 23. Rear floor side (RH & LH) 24. Front side member assembly (RH & LH)

25. Front side member front extension (RH & LH)

26. Front side member connector as-sembly (RH & LH)

27. Front side member closing plate as-sembly (RH & LH)

28. Front side member front closing plate (RH & LH)

29. Front side member center closing plate (RH & LH)

30. Front side member rear extension (RH & LH)

31. Front side member outrigger assem-bly (RH & LH)

32. Rear seat crossmember 33. 2nd rear crossmember

34. Rear crossmember center assembly 35. Rear side member assembly (RH & LH)

36. Rear side member extension (RH & LH)

37. Front side rear closing reinforcement (RH & LH)

: Both sided anti-corrosive precoated steel sections

: High strength steel (HSS) sections

: Both sided anti-corrosive steel and HSS sections


< PREPARATION >
Body Component Parts INFOID:0000000004249892

1. Hood 2. Front fender (RH & LH) 3. Upper front pillar reinforcement (RH & LH)

4. Front pillar brace (RH & LH) 5. Outer lock pillar reinforcement (RH & LH)

6. Outer side roof rail reinforcement (RH & LH)

JSKIA0365GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P

< PREPARATION >

B

NOTE:

For the parts without a number described in the figure, it is supplied only with the assembly part that the part is included with.

7. Outer step sill (RH & LH) 8. Outer sill reinforcement (RH & LH) 9. Upper inner front pillar assembly (RH & LH)

10. Front roof rail brace (RH & LH) 11. Inner side roof rail (RH & LH) 12. Rear roof rail brace (RH & LH)

13. Inner center pillar (RH & LH) 14. Inner rear pillar (RH & LH) 15. Rear pillar reinforcement (RH & LH)

16. Outer rear wheelhouse (RH & LH) 17. Upper outer rear wheelhouse exten-sion (RH & LH)

18. Lower outer rear wheelhouse exten-sion (RH & LH)

19. Inner rear wheelhouse (RH & LH) 20. Side parcel shelf (RH & LH) 21. Seat back support (RH & LH)

22. Parcel shelf with rear waist 23. Roof 24. Front roof rail

25. Roof bow No.1 26. Roof bow No.2 27. Rear roof rail

28. Roof assembly 29. Rear fender assembly (RH & LH) 30. Tail pillar assembly (RH & LH)

31. Rear bumper center bracket (RH & LH)

32. Rear fender extension (RH & LH) 33. Rear panel assembly

34. Rear bumper fascia center bracket 35. Rear bumper fascia bracket 36. Door assembly (RH & LH)

37. Outer door panel (RH & LH) 38. Trunk lid 39. Inner center front bumper reinforce-ment

40. Rear bumper stay (RH & LH) 41. Inner center rear bumper reinforce-ment assembly

42. Center rear bumper reinforcement

43. Rear bumper overrider assembly

: Both sided anti-corrosive precoated steel sections

: High strength steel (HSS) sections

: Both sided anti-corrosive steel and HSS sections* : Aluminum portion


CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONCORROSION PROTECTION

Description INFOID:0000000004684876

To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following anti-corrosive measures have been implemented inNISSAN production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is necessary to use the same anti-cor-rosive measures.

Anti-Corrosive Precoated Steel (Galvannealed Steel)To improve repairability and corrosion resistance, a new type of anti-corrosive precoated steel sheet is adopted replacing conventionalzinc-coated steel sheet.Galvannealed steel is electroplated and heated to form Zinc-ironalloy, which provides excellent and long term corrosion resistancewith cationic electrodeposition primer.

NISSAN genuine parts are fabricated from galvannealed steel. Therefore, it is recommended that NISSANgenuine parts or an equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain the anti-corrosive performance builtinto the vehicle at the factory.

Phosphate Coating Treatment and Cationic Electrodeposition PrimerA phosphate coating treatment and a cationic electrodepositionprimer, which provide excellent corrosion protection, are applied toall body components.CAUTION:Confine paint removal during welding operation to an absoluteminimum.

NISSAN genuine parts are also treated in the same manner. Therefore, it is recommended that NISSAN gen-uine parts or an equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain anti-corrosive performance built into thevehicle at the factory.

Anti-corrosive Wax INFOID:0000000004249894

To improve corrosion resistance, anti-corrosive wax is applied inside the body sill and inside other closed sec-tions. Accordingly, when replacing these parts, be sure to apply anti-corrosive wax to the appropriate areas ofthe new parts. Select an excellent anti-corrosive wax which will penetrate after application and has a long shelflife.

DOOR

SIIA2294E

PIIA0095E



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Undercoating (2WD) INFOID:0000000004249895

The underside of the floor and wheelhouse are undercoated to prevent rust, vibration, noise and stone chip-ping. Therefore, when such a panel is replaced or repaired, apply undercoating to that part. Use an undercoat-ing which is rust resistant, soundproof, vibration-proof, shock-resistant, adhesive, and durable.

Precautions in Undercoating1. Never apply undercoating to any place unless specified (such as the areas above the muffler and three-

way catalyst that are subjected to heat).2. Never undercoat the exhaust pipe or other parts that become hot.3. Never undercoat rotating parts.4. Apply bitumen wax after applying undercoating.5. After putting seal on the vehicle, put undercoating on it.

A. Nozzle insert hole

: Anti-corrosive wax coated portions

JSKIA0366GB


Undercoating (AWD) INFOID:0000000004553935

The underside of the floor and wheelhouse are undercoated to prevent rust, vibration, noise and stone chip-ping. Therefore, when such a panel is replaced or repaired, apply undercoating to that part. Use an undercoat-ing which is rust resistant, soundproof, vibration-proof, shock-resistant, adhesive, and durable.

Precautions in Undercoating1. Never apply undercoating to any place unless specified (such as the areas above the muffler and three-

way catalyst that are subjected to heat).2. Never undercoat the exhaust pipe or other parts that become hot.3. Never undercoat rotating parts.4. Apply bitumen wax after applying undercoating.5. After putting seal on the vehicle, put undercoating on it.

: Undercoated areas

: Sealed portions

JSKIA1697ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Body Sealing (2WD) INFOID:0000000004249896

DESCRIPTIONThe following figure shows the areas that are sealed at the factory. Sealant that is applied to these areasshould be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to apply an excess amount of sealantand not to allow other unaffected parts to come into contact with the sealant.

: Undercoated areas

: Sealed portions

JSKIA1698ZZ


: Vehicle front

: Sealed portions

JSKIA1699ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

: Vehicle front

: Sealed portions

JSKIA0369GB


Body Sealing (AWD) INFOID:0000000004554898

DESCRIPTIONThe following figure shows the areas that are sealed at the factory. Sealant that is applied to these areasshould be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to apply an excess amount of sealantand not to allow other unaffected parts to come into contact with the sealant.

: Vehicle front

: Sealed portions

JSKIA0370GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

: Vehicle front

: Sealed portions

JSKIA1700ZZ


: Vehicle front

: Sealed portions

JSKIA0872ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

: Vehicle front

: Sealed portions

JSKIA0370GB


BODY CONSTRUCTION
BODY CONSTRUCTION

Body Construction INFOID:0000000004249897

1. Upper outer front pillar 2. Outer front pillar reinforcement 3. Upper inner front pillar

4. Inner front pillar reinforcement 5. Lower outer front pillar 6. Front pillar hinge brace

7. Upper hinge plate 8. Weld nut 9. Upper rear hoodledge

JSKIA0371GB


BODY CONSTRUCTION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Rear Fender Hemming Process INFOID:0000000004684833

1. A wheel arch is to be installed and hemmed over the left and right outer wheel houses.2. In order to hem the wheel arch, it is necessary to repair any damaged or defaced parts around outer

wheel house.CAUTION:Ensure that the area that is to be glued around the outer wheelhouse is undamaged or defaced.

PROCEDURE OF THE HEMMING PROCESS• Peel off old bonding material on the surface of the outer wheel-

house and clean thoroughly.• Peel off a primer coat in the specified area where new adhesive is

to be applied on rear fender (the replacing part).• Apply new adhesive to both specified areas of the outer wheel-

house and rear fender.

• Attach rear fender to the body of the car, and weld the requiredpart except the hemming part.

• Bend the welded part starting from the center of the wheel archgradually with a hammer and a dolly. (Also hem the end of theflange.)

• Hemming with a hammer is conducted to an approximate angle of80 degrees.

10. Hoodledge reinforcement 11. Upper dash 12. Lower hinge plate

13. Lower dash crossmember 14. Lower front pillar gusset 15. Front fender bracket

16. Outer sill reinforcement 17. Lower front pillar reinforcement 18. Inner sill

19. Lower dash 20. Front side member outrigger 21. Outer step sill

22. Outer sill brace 23. Inner sill reinforcement 24. Front floor

25. 2nd crossmember 26. Rear fender 27. Lock pillar reinforcement

28. Center sill reinforcement 29. 3rd crossmember 30. Upper inner lock pillar reinforcement

31. Inner lock pillar 32. Lock pillar seat belt anchor 33. Rear pillar reinforcement

34. Inner side roof rail 35. Inner rear pillar 36. Outer rear sill reinforcement

37. Outer rear wheelhouse extension 38. Outer rear wheelhouse 39. Rear side member front

40. Rear tie down hook bracket 41. Rear side member front reinforce-ment

42. Rear floor front

43. Outer rear wheelhouse brace 44. Inner rear wheelhouse

<Adhesive> 3M™ Automix™ Panel Bonding Adhe-sive 08115 or equivalent

JSKIA0136GB

SIIA2245E


BODY CONSTRUCTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >• Starting from the center, hem the wheel arch gradually, using slight
back and forth motion with a hemming tool.

• Seal up the area around the hemmed end of the flange.

SIIA2246E

JSKIA0137GB


REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B



• This section is prepared for technicians who have attained a high level of skill and experience in repairingcollision-damaged vehicles and also use modern service tools and equipment. Persons unfamiliar with bodyrepair techniques should not attempt to repair collision-damaged vehicles by using this section.

• Technicians are also encouraged to read the Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) in order to ensure that theoriginal functions and quality of the vehicle are maintained. The Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) con-tains additional information, including cautions and warnings, that are not including in this manual. Techni-cians should refer to both manuals to ensure proper repair.

• Please note that this information is prepared for worldwide usage, and as such, certain procedures might notapply in some regions or countries.

The symbols used in this section for welding operations are shown below.

Symbol marks Description

2-spot welds

3-spot welds

MIG plug weldFor 3 panels plug weld method

MIG seam weld / Point weld

JSKIA0049ZZ

JSKIA0053ZZ

JSKIA0050ZZ

JSKIA0051ZZ

JSKIA0054ZZ

JSKIA0055ZZ

JSKIA0052ZZ JSKIA0056ZZ


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >• Front pillar butt joint can be determined anywhere within shaded
area as shown in the figure. The best location for the butt joint is atposition A due to the construction of the vehicle.

• Determine cutting position and record distance from the locatingindent. Use this distance when cutting the service part. Cut outerfront pillar over 60 mm (2.36 in) above the inner front pillar cutposition.

• Prepare a cutting jig to make outer pillar easier to cut. Also, this willpermit the service part to be accurately cut at the joint position.

• An example of cutting operation using a cutting jig is as per the fol-lowing.

1. Mark cutting lines.A: Cut position of outer pillarB: Cut position of inner pillar

2. Align cutting line with notch on jig. Clamp jig to pillar.3. Cut outer pillar along groove of jig (at position A).4. Remove jig and cut remaining portions.5. Cut inner pillar at position B in same manner.

PIIA0150E

JSKIA0104GB

JSKIA0105GB

PIIA0153E



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Radiator Core Support INFOID:0000000004249906

Hoodledge INFOID:0000000004249907

Work after radiator core support is removed.Remove the front side member center closing plate (reusable).

: Vehicle front

Replacement parts

Radiator core support assembly (LH) Front side member connector as-sembly (LH)

JSKIA0373GB


1. Front side member center closing plate

: Vehicle front

Replacement parts

Upper front hoodledge (LH) Hoodledge reinforcement (LH) Front strut housing (LH)

JSKIA0374GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

View C and F: Before installing hoodledge reinforcement

: Vehicle front

JSKIA0375GB


Front Side Member (2WD) INFOID:0000000004249908

Work after radiator core support and hoodledge are removed.Assemble the hoodledge and check the fitting according to Body Alignment before replacing the front sidemember center closing plate.

1. Front side member center closing plate

: Vehicle front

JSKIA0376GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

: Vehicle front

Replacement parts

Front side member assembly (LH) Front side member closing plate as-sembly (LH)

Front side member outrigger assem-bly (LH)

JSKIA0377GB


View G: Before installing front side member outrigger assembly

: Vehicle front

JSKIA0378GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Front Side Member (AWD) INFOID:0000000004553900

Work after radiator core support and hoodledge are removed.Assemble the hoodledge and check the fitting according to Body Alignment before replacing the front sidemember center closing plate.

: Vehicle front

JSKIA0379GB


Unit: mm (in)

: Vehicle front

Replacement parts

Front side member assembly (LH) Front side member closing plate as-sembly (LH)

Front side member outrigger assem-bly (LH)

JSKIA0866GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

View F and H: Before installing front side member outrigger assembly

Front Side Member (Partial Replacement) INFOID:0000000004249909

Work after radiator core support is removed.

Unit: mm (in)

: Vehicle front

JSKIA0867GB


Front Pillar INFOID:0000000004249910

Work after hoodledge reinforcement and outer step sill are removed.

Unit: mm (in)

: Vehicle front

Replacement parts

Front side member front extension (RH)

Front side member front closing plate (RH)

JSKIA0873GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

1. Urethane foam

: Vehicle front

Replacement parts

Upper front pillar reinforcement (LH) Upper rear hoodledge (LH) Upper inner front pillar assembly (LH)

JSKIA0381GB


View D: Before installing upper front pillar reinforcement

: Vehicle front

JSKIA0382GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Outer Sill INFOID:0000000004249911

Work after hoodledge reinforcement, outer lock pillar reinforcement and rear fender are removed.Remove the welding point (A) for easier replacement.

1. Urethane foam 2. Inner front pillar reinforcement

: Vehicle front

JSKIA0383GB


Remove the welding point (A) for easier replacement.

1. Urethane foam (Cover the hole with urethane foam completely.)

: Vehicle front

Replacement parts

Outer step sill (LH) Outer sill reinforcement (LH) Upper outer rear wheelhouse exten-sion (LH)

Lower outer rear wheelhouse exten-sion (LH)

JSKIA0384GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

View D: Before installing outer sill reinforcementView E: Before installing outer sill reinforcement and upper outer rear wheelhouse extensionView F: Before installing outer sill reinforcement, upper outer rear wheelhouse extension and lower outer rearwheelhouse extensionView G: Before installing outer step sill

: Vehicle front

: Drill φ8 mm (0.31 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel plate).

JSKIA0385GB


Rear Fender INFOID:0000000004249912

A. Hemming portion

: Vehicle front

: Drill φ10 mm (0.39 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength plate).

Replacement parts

Rear fender assembly (LH)

JSKIA0386GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

INSTALLATION NOTES

: Vehicle front

: Drill φ8 mm (0.31 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength plate).

JSKIA0387GB


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >• Apply the adhesive to the flange of wheel arch and hem it.• Seal up the area around the hemmed end of the flange.• Refer to BRM-23, "Rear Fender Hemming Process".
Lock Pillar Reinforcement INFOID:0000000004249913

Work after roof and rear fender are removed.Never cut and joint the shaded area (see Figure) of lock pillar reinforcement, because it is made of ultra highstrength steel plate.

1. Outer rear wheelhouse 2. Rear fender

3. Adhesive 4. Sealant

JSKIA0204GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Lock Pillar Reinforcement (Partial Replacement) INFOID:0000000004249914

Work after rear fender are removed.Never cut and joint the shaded area (see Figure) of lock pillar reinforcement and the upper inner lock pillarreinforcement, because they are made of ultra high strength steel plate.

: Vehicle front

: Drill φ10 mm (0.39 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel plate).

Replacement parts

Outer lock pillar reinforcement (LH)

JSKIA0388GB


Outer Wheelhouse INFOID:0000000004249915

Work after rear fender is removed.Cut the upper outer rear wheelhouse extension and the rear pillar reinforcement as shown in the figure forrepairing the hidden welding point.Reuse the upper outer rear wheelhouse extension and the rear pillar reinforcement (cut parts).

1. Upper inner lock pillar reinforcement

: Vehicle front

Replacement parts

Outer lock pillar reinforcement (LH)

JSKIA0389GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

View B: Before installing upper outer rear wheelhouse extensionView C: Before installing rear pillar reinforcement

: vehicle front

Replacement parts

Outer rear wheelhouse (LH)

JSKIA0390GB


Rear Panel INFOID:0000000004249916

Rear Floor Rear INFOID:0000000004249917

Work after rear panel is removed.

: An equivalent welding portion with the same dimensions is on the opposite side.

Replacement parts

Rear panel assembly

JSKIA0391GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Rear Side Member Extension (2WD) INFOID:0000000004249918


: Vehicle front

: An equivalent welding portion with the same dimensions is on the opposite side.

Replacement parts

Rear floor rear Spare tire clamp bracket

JSKIA0392GB


Rear Side Member Extension (AWD) INFOID:0000000004553901


: Vehicle front

Replacement parts

Rear side member extension (LH)

JSKIA0393GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

: Vehicle front

Replacement parts

Rear side member extension (LH)

JSKIA0869ZZ


BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)BODY ALIGNMENT

Body Center Marks INFOID:0000000004674753

A mark is placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing the vehicle frame(members, pillars, etc.) damaged by an accident which it enables more accurate and effective repair by usingthese marks together with body alignment specifications.

Unit: mm (in)

: Vehicle front

Points Portion Marks

A, B Upper dash Embossment

C Front roof Embossment

D Rear roof Embossment

JSKIA0372GB


BODY ALIGNMENT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B


• All dimensions indicated in the figures are actual.• When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge itself

to make sure there is no free play.• When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.• Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes.• An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other side

is symmetrically the same value.• The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of ″X″, ″Y″

and ″Z″.• ″Z″: Imaginary base line [200 mm (7.87 in) below datum line (″0Z″ at design plan)]

Engine Compartment (2WD) INFOID:0000000004555403

MeasurementDimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of thevehicle.

E Rear waist Embossment

F Trans control reinforcement Hole 14×12 (0.55×0.47)

Points Portion Marks

1. Vehicle center 2. Front axle center 3. Imaginary base line

JSKIA0073GB


BODY ALIGNMENT
«The others»Unit: mm (in)

Measurement Points

JSKIA0352GB

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo

A - D 744 (29.29)* B - d 1489 (58.62)* D - d 1427 (56.18)

B - D 227 (8.94)* C - h 875 (34.45)* J - j 903 (35.55)


BODY ALIGNMENT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Unit: mm (in)

Engine Compartment (AWD) INFOID:0000000004555408

Measurement

: Vehicle front

JSKIA0353GB

Point Material Point Material

A Upper dash indent of center positioning mark F, fRadiator core stay installing hole center φ12 (0.47)

B, b Hood hinge installing hole center φ12 (0.47) G, g Front side member hole center φ20 (0.79)

C, cFront strut installing hole center 16×10 (0.63×0.39)

H, h, J, j Nut holder hole center φ16 (0.63)

D, dUpper front fender bracket installing hole center φ7 (0.28)

K, k, M, mFront bumper stay installing hole center φ11 (0.43)

E, e Hoodledge reinforcement hole center φ12 (0.47)


BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of thevehicle.

Measurement Points

Unit: mm (in)

JSKIA0874GB

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo

A - D 744 (29.29)* B - d 1489 (58.62)* D - d 1427 (56.18)

B - D 227 (8.94)* C - h 878 (34.57)* J - j 906 (35.67)


BODY ALIGNMENT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Unit: mm (in)

Underbody (2WD) INFOID:0000000004249901

Measurement

: Vehicle front

JSKIA0875ZZ


A Upper dash indent of center positioning mark F, fRadiator core stay installing hole center φ12 (0.47)

B, b Hood hinge installing hole center φ12 (0.47) G, g Front side member hole center φ20 (0.79)

C, cFront strut installing hole center 16×10 (0.63×0.39)

H, h, J, j Nut holder hole center φ16 (0.63)

D, dUpper front fender bracket installing hole center φ7 (0.28)

K, k, M, mFront bumper stay installing hole center φ11 (0.43)

E, e Hoodledge reinforcement hole center φ12 (0.47)


BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of thevehicle.
Measurement Points

Unit: mm (in)

: Vehicle front

: Bolt head

JSKIA0893GB


BODY ALIGNMENT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Unit: mm (in)

: Vehicle front

PointsCoordinates

Remarks PointsCoordinates

RemarksX Y Z X Y Z

A, a±416.0

(±16.378)−496.0

(−19.528)224.5

(8.839)Hole φ13 (0.51) J, j

±451.5(±17.776)

3163.9(124.563)

179.1(7.051)

Bolt head

B, b ±415.0

(±16.339)−104.0

(−4.094)133.5

(5.256)Bolt head K

550.0(21.654)

3264.6(128.527)

318.0 (12.520)

Hole φ8 (0.31)

C, c±392.0

(±15.433)414.0

(16.299)64.5

(2.539)Bolt head k

−500.0(−19.685)

3273.3(128.870)

318.0(12.520)

Hole φ8 (0.31)

D, d±428.0

(±16.850)816.6

(32.150)80.0

(3.150)Hole 16×18 (0.63×0.71)

M533.0

(20.984)3475.0

(136.811)317.0

(12.480)Hole φ16 (0.63)

E, e±438.0

(±17.244)1100.0

(43.307)78.0

(3.071)Hole φ16 (0.63) m

−533.0(−20.984)

3475.0(136.811)

316.4(12.457)

Hole φ16 (0.63)

F, f±437.5

(±17.224)1810.0

(71.260)81.2

(3.197)Hole φ16 (0.63) N, n

±423.0(±16.654)

38.0(1.496)

674.5(26.555)

Hole φ50.1 (1.972)

JSKIA0355GB


BODY ALIGNMENT
Underbody (AWD) INFOID:0000000004555222


G, g±604.0

(±23.779)2390.5

(94.114)128.3

(5.051)Hole φ13 (0.51) O, o

±488.4(±19.228)

2891.7(113.846)

825.0(32.480)

Hole φ68 (2.68)

H, h±472.6

(±18.606)2603.8

(102.512)114.0

(4.488)Bolt head

PointsCoordinates


RemarksX Y Z X Y Z


BODY ALIGNMENT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Measurement Points

Unit: mm (in)

: Vehicle front

: Bolt head

JSKIA0876GB


BODY ALIGNMENT
Unit: mm (in)

: Vehicle front

PointsCoordinates


RemarksX Y Z X Y Z

A, a±416.0

(±16.378)−496.0

(−19.528)224.5

(8.839)Hole φ13 (0.51) J, j

±451.5(±17.776)

3163.9(124.563)

179.1(7.051)

Bolt head

B, b ±411.0

(±16.181)−261.0

(−10.276)105.5

(4.154)Bolt head K

±550.0(21.654)

3264.6(128.527)

318.0 (12.520)

Hole φ8 (0.31)

C, c±395.0

(±15.551)76.0

(2.992)129.5

(5.098)Bolt head k

−500.0(−19.685)

3273.3(128.870)

318.0(12.520)

Hole φ8 (0.31)

D, d±428.0

(±16.850)816.6

(32.150)80.0

(3.150)Hole 16×18 (0.63×0.71)

M533.0

(20.984)3475.0

(136.811)317.0

(12.480)Hole φ16 (0.63)

E, e±438.0

(±17.244)1100.0

(43.307)78.0

(3.071)Hole φ16 (0.63) m

−533.0(−20.984)

3475.0(136.811)

316.4(12.457)

Hole φ16 (0.63)

F, f±437.5

(±17.224)1810.0

(71.260)81.2

(3.197)Hole φ16 (0.63) N, n

±423.0(±16.654)

38.0(1.496)

674.5(26.555)

Hole φ50.1 (1.972)

JSKIA0877ZZ


BODY ALIGNMENT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Passenger Compartment INFOID:0000000004249902



Measurement Points

G, g±604.0

(±23.779)2390.5

(94.114)128.3

(5.051)Hole φ13 (0.51) O, o

±488.4(±19.228)

2891.7(113.846)

825.0(32.480)

Hole φ68 (2.68)

H, h±472.6

(±18.606)2603.8

(102.512)114.0

(4.488)Bolt head

PointsCoordinates


RemarksX Y Z X Y Z

JSKIA0356GB

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo

E - e 1253 (49.33) F - j 1796 (70.71)* J - j 1451 (57.13) M - H 1434 (56.46)*

E - g 1607 (63.27)* G - g 1447 (56.97) K - E 987 (38.86)* M - J 1186 (46.69)*

E - h 1472 (57.95)* G - h 1997 (78.62)* K - F 793 (31.22)* N - H 1558 (61.34)*

E - j 1607 (63.27)* G - j 1822 (71.73)* K - G 749 (29.49)* N - J 1170 (46.06)*

F - f 1446 (56.93) H - h 1240 (48.82) K - H 1443 (56.81)*

F - h 1861 (73.27)* H - j 1503 (59.17)* K - J 1164 (45.83)*


BODY ALIGNMENT
Unit: mm (in)

Rear Body INFOID:0000000004249903

Measurement

: Vehicle front

JSKIA0357GB


AUpper dash positioning mark of center position-ing mark

H, h, J, j Rear fender indent

B Roof flange end of center positioning mark KTrans control reinforcement hole center of center positioning mark 14×12 (0.55×0.47)

C, c, D, d Front pillar joggle M, m, N, nDoor hinge installing hole centerM, m: φ14 (0.55)N, n: φ12 (0.47)

E, e, F, f, G, g Front pillar indent


BODY ALIGNMENT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of thevehicle.

Measurement Points

JSKIA0358GB


BODY ALIGNMENT
: Vehicle front

JSKIA0359GB


A Roof flange end of center positioning mark F, f, G, g Rear combination lamp base joggle

B, b, C, c, E, e Rear fender corner joggle HUpper rear panel flange end of center positioning mark

D Rear waist flange end of center positioning mark


LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B


Precautions for Plastics INFOID:0000000004684865

CAUTION:

• When repairing and painting a portion of the body adjacent to plastic parts, consider their characteristics (influence of heatand solvent) and remove them if necessary or take suitable measures to protect them.

• Plastic parts should be repaired and painted using methods suiting the materials, characteristics.

Abbre-viation

Material nameHeat resisting temperature

°C (°F)

Resistance to gasoline and solvents

Other cautions

PE Polyethylene 60 (140)Gasoline and most solvents are harmless if applied for a very short time (wipe out quickly).

Flammable

ABS Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene 80 (176) Avoid gasoline and solvents. —

EPM/EPDM

Ethylene Propylene (Diene) co-polymer

80 (176)Gasoline and most solvents are harmless if applied for a very short time (wipe out quickly).

Flammable

PS Polystyrene 80 (176) Avoid solvents. Flammable

PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride 80 (176)Gasoline and most solvents are harmless if applied for a very short time (wipe out quickly).

Poisonous gas is emitted when burned.

TPO Thermoplastic Olefine 80 (176) ↑ Flammable

AAS Acrylonitrile Acrylic Styrene 85 (185) Avoid gasoline and solvents. —

PMMA Poly Methyl Methacrylate 85 (185) ↑ —

EVAC Ethylene Vinyl Acetate 90 (194) ↑ —

PP Polypropylene 90 (194)Gasoline and most solvents are harmless if applied for a very short time (wipe out quickly).

Flammable, avoid bat-tery acid.

PUR Polyurethane 90 (194) Avoid gasoline and solvents. —

UP Unsaturated Polyester 90 (194) ↑ Flammable

ASA Acrylonitrile Styrene Acrylate 100 (212) ↑ Flammable

PPE Poly Phenylene Ether 110 (230) ↑ —

TPU Thermoplastic Urethane 110 (230) ↑ —

PBT+ PC

Poly Butylene Terephthalate + Polycarbonate

120 (248) ↑ Flammable

PC Polycarbonate 120 (248) ↑ —

POM Poly Oxymethylene 120 (248) ↑ Avoid battery acid.

PA Polyamide 140 (284) ↑ Avoid immersing in wa-ter.

PBT Poly Butylene Terephthalate 140 (284) ↑ —

PAR Polyarylate 180 (356) ↑ —

PET Polyethylene terephthalate 180 (356) ↑ —

PEI Polyetherimide 200 (392) ↑ —


Location of Plastic Parts INFOID:0000000004249890

Component Material Component Material

1 Bumper fascia PP9 High mount stop lamp

Lens PMMA

2 Front grille ABS Housing ABS

3 Front combination lampLens PC 10 Satellite radio antenna ASA + PC

Housing PP 11 Fuel filler lid PA + PPE

4 Windshield molding TPO 12 Door outside molding PVC + Stainless

5 Roof side molding PVC + Stainless 13 Door outside handle PC + PET

6 Front pillar finisher PC + PET14 License plate lamp

Lens PMMA

7 Door outside mirror

Cover ABS Housing PC

Housing PP 15 Wheel disk cap PC + ABS

Base PA + Glass fiber 16 Center mudguard PP

8 Trunk lid finisher ABS

JSKIA0362GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

RM

N

O

P


B

Component Material Component Material

1 Rear pillar finisher PP

7 Instrument panel

Core PP

2 Front pillar finisher PP Pad PUR

3 Map lampLens PC Skin TPU

Housing PP

8 Glove box

Core ABS

4 Cluster lid AUpper ABS Pad PUR

Lower PP Skin PVC

5 Cluster lid D ABS 9 Center console PP + PVC

6 Cluster lid C

Standard finisher

ABS

Wood fin-isher

PC + ABS

JSKIA0363GB


CRUISE CONTROL

C

D

E

BSECTION CCS

A

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

CS

N

P

CONTENTS

C

ICC

BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 4

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ......... 4Work Flow .................................................................4

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ..................... 6

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT) ............................................................................6

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT) : Description ....................................................6ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT) : Special Repair Requirement .........................6

LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT ......................6LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Descrip-tion ............................................................................6LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement (Preparation) ............................7LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement (Setting The ICC Target Board) .......................................................................7LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement (Laser Beam Aiming Adjust-ment) .......................................................................10

ACTION TEST ...........................................................11ACTION TEST : Description ...................................12ACTION TEST : Special Repair Requirement (Ve-hicle-To-Vehicle Distance Control Mode) ................12ACTION TEST : Special Repair Requirement [Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode] ......................................................................14

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................17

ICC ......................................................................17

System Diagram ......................................................17System Description ..................................................17Component Parts Location ......................................20Component Description ...........................................21

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CON-TROL MODE FUNCTION ..................................22


CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE FUNCTION ..........................31


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ICC SENSOR INTE-GRATED UNIT) .................................................37

Diagnosis Description ..............................................37CONSULT-III Function (ICC) ...................................38

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS .........................43

C1A00 CONTROL UNIT ...................................43Description ...............................................................43DTC Logic ................................................................43Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................43Special Repair Requirement ....................................43

C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2 ...........................45

Description ...............................................................45DTC Logic ................................................................45Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................45Special Repair Requirement ....................................45

C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..................47Description ...............................................................47DTC Logic ................................................................47

CCS-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

Diagnosis Procedure (A/T Models) ......................... 47Diagnosis Procedure (M/T Models) ........................ 48Special Repair Requirement ................................... 48

C1A04 ABS/TCS/VDC SYSTEM ....................... 50Description .............................................................. 50DTC Logic ............................................................... 50Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 50Special Repair Requirement ................................... 50

C1A05 BRAKE SW/STOP LAMP SW ............... 52Description .............................................................. 52DTC Logic ............................................................... 52Diagnosis Procedure (A/T Models) ......................... 52Diagnosis Procedure (M/T Models) ........................ 55Component Inspection (ICC Brake Switch) ............ 58Component Inspection (ICC Clutch Switch) ........... 58Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) ........... 58Special Repair Requirement ................................... 58

C1A06 OPERATION SW ................................... 60Description .............................................................. 60DTC Logic ............................................................... 60Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 60Component Inspection ............................................ 61Special Repair Requirement ................................... 62

C1A12 LASER BEAM OFF CENTER ............... 63Description .............................................................. 63DTC Logic ............................................................... 63Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 63Special Repair Requirement ................................... 63

C1A13 STOP LAMP RELAY ............................. 64Description .............................................................. 64DTC Logic ............................................................... 64Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 64Component Inspection ............................................ 69Special Repair Requirement ................................... 69

C1A14 ECM ....................................................... 70Description .............................................................. 70DTC Logic ............................................................... 70Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 70Special Repair Requirement ................................... 70

C1A15 GEAR POSITION ................................... 72Description .............................................................. 72DTC Logic ............................................................... 72Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 72Special Repair Requirement ................................... 73

C1A16 RADAR STAIN ...................................... 75Description .............................................................. 75DTC Logic ............................................................... 75Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 75Special Repair Requirement ................................... 75

C1A18 LASER AIMING INCMP ........................ 77Description .............................................................. 77DTC Logic ............................................................... 77

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 77Special Repair Requirement ................................... 77

C1A21 UNIT HIGH TEMP .................................. 79Description .............................................................. 79DTC Logic ............................................................... 79Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 79Special Repair Requirement ................................... 79

C1A24 NP RANGE ............................................ 81Description .............................................................. 81DTC Logic ............................................................... 81Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 81Special Repair Requirement ................................... 82

C1A26 ECD MODE MALFUNCTION ................ 83Description .............................................................. 83DTC Logic ............................................................... 83Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 83Special Repair Requirement ................................... 83

C1A27 ECD POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT .......... 85Description .............................................................. 85DTC Logic ............................................................... 85Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 85Special Repair Requirement ................................... 86

C1A33 CAN TRANSMISSION ERROR ............. 87Description .............................................................. 87DTC Logic ............................................................... 87Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 87Special Repair Requirement ................................... 87

C1A34 COMMAND ERROR .............................. 89Description .............................................................. 89DTC Logic ............................................................... 89Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 89Special Repair Requirement ................................... 89

U0121 VDC CAN 2 ............................................ 91Description .............................................................. 91DTC Logic ............................................................... 91Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 91Special Repair Requirement ................................... 91

U0401 ECM CAN 1 ............................................ 93Description .............................................................. 93DTC Logic ............................................................... 93Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 93Special Repair Requirement ................................... 93

U0402 TCM CAN 1 ............................................ 95Description .............................................................. 95DTC Logic ............................................................... 95Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 95Special Repair Requirement ................................... 95

U0415 VDC CAN 1 ............................................ 97Description .............................................................. 97DTC Logic ............................................................... 97Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 97


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

CS

N

P

A

C

Special Repair Requirement ...................................97

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .............................99Description ..............................................................99DTC Logic ...............................................................99Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................99Special Repair Requirement ...................................99

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 101Description ............................................................ 101DTC Logic ............................................................. 101Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 101Special Repair Requirement ................................. 101

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 102Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 102

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CIR-CUIT .................................................................. 103

Description ............................................................ 103Component Function Check .................................. 103Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 103Component Inspection .......................................... 104

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 105

ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT .................. 105Reference Value ................................................... 105Wiring Diagram - INTELLIGENT CRUISE CON-TROL - .................................................................. 108Fail-Safe ................................................................ 112DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 113DTC Index ............................................................. 113

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 115

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ..................................................... 115

Symptom Table ..................................................... 115

MAIN SWITCH DOES NOT TURN ON, MAIN SWITCH DOES NOT TURN OFF ..................... 116

Description ............................................................ 116Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 116

ICC SYSTEM CANNOT BE SET (MAIN SWITCH TURNS ON/OFF) ............................... 117

Description ............................................................ 117Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 117

ICC STEERING SWITCH (OTHER THAN MAIN SWITCH) DOES NOT FUNCTION ......... 119

Description .............................................................119Diagnosis Procedure .............................................119

ICC SYSTEM DOES NOT CANCEL WHEN A/T SELECTOR LEVER SETS ON "N" ............. 120


CHIME DOES NOT SOUND ........................... 121Description .............................................................121Diagnosis Procedure .............................................121

DRIVING FORCE IS HUNTING ...................... 123Description .............................................................123Diagnosis Procedure .............................................123

FREQUENTLY CANNOT DETECT THE VEHI-CLE AHEAD / DETECTION ZONE IS SHORT . 124


THE SYSTEM DOES NOT DETECT THE VE-HICLE AHEAD AT ALL .................................. 125


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 126Description .............................................................126

PRECAUTION ............................................ 129

PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 129Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ...............................................................129Precaution for Battery Service ...............................129ICC System Service ..............................................129

PREPARATION ......................................... 130

PREPARATION ............................................... 130Special Service Tools ............................................130

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 131

ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT ................. 131Exploded View .......................................................131Removal and Installation .......................................132

ICC STEERING SWITCH ................................ 133Exploded View .......................................................133


[ICC]DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTIONDIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW

Work Flow INFOID:0000000004638191

OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW

1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION

It is also important to clarify the customer concerns before starting the inspection. Interview the customerabout the concerns carefully and understand the symptoms fully.

JPOIA0171GB


CS

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< BASIC INSPECTION >NOTE:The customers are not professionals. Never assume that “maybe the customer means···” or “maybe the cus-tomer mentioned this symptom”.

>> GO TO 2.

2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III

1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 2. Check if any DTC is detected in self-diagnosis results of “ICC”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> GO TO 3.

3.ACTION TEST

Perform the ICC system action test to check the operation status. Refer to CCS-12, "ACTION TEST : Descrip-tion". Check if any other malfunctions occur.

>> GO TO 4.

4.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Perform the applicable diagnosis according to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to CCS-115, "SymptomTable".

>> GO TO 6.

5.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BY DTC

1. Check the DTC in the self-diagnosis results. 2. Perform trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC. Refer to CCS-113, "DTC Index".NOTE:If “DTC: U1000” is detected, first diagnose the CAN communication system.

>> GO TO 6.

6.MALFUNCTIONING PART REPAIR

Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.

>> GO TO 7.

7.REPAIR CHECK (SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III)

1. Erases self-diagnosis results. 2. Perform “All DTC Reading” again after repairing or replacing the malfunctioning parts. 3. Check if any DTC is detected in self-diagnosis results of “ICC”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> GO TO 8.

8.REPAIR CHECK (ACTION TEST)

Perform the ICC system action test. Check if the malfunction symptom is solved or no other symptoms occur.Is there any malfunction symptom?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> INSPECTION END


[ICC]INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (ICC SENSOR IN-TEGRATED UNIT)

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (ICC SENSOR INTE-GRATED UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000004638192

• Always perform the laser beam aiming adjustment after removing and installing or replacing the ICC sensorintegrated unit. CAUTION:The system does not operate normally unless the laser beam aiming adjustment is performed.Always perform it.

• Perform the ICC system action test to check that the ICC system operates normally.

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (ICC SENSOR INTE-GRATED UNIT) : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004638193

1.LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the laser beam aiming. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description".

>> GO TO 2.

2.ICC SYSTEM ACTION TEST

1. Perform the ICC system action test. Refer to CCS-12, "ACTION TEST : Description". 2. Check that the ICC system operates normally.

>> INSPECTION ENDLASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT

LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description INFOID:0000000004638194

OUTLINE OF LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENTAlways adjust the laser beam aiming after removing and installing or replacing the ICC sensor integrated unit. CAUTION:The system does not operate normally unless the laser beam aiming adjustment is performed. Alwaysperform it. 1. Set the ICC target board [SST: KV99110100 (J-45718)] to the correct position in front of the vehicle.

NOTE:The location of the ICC sensor integrated unit (1) differs according to the front bumper fascia type. So theICC target board setting position varies accordingly.

2. Set the laser beam aiming mode (“LASER BEAM ADJUST” on “Work support”) with CONSULT-III, andthen perform the adjustment according to the display. (Manually turn the up-down direction adjusting

A : Normal front bumper fascia type B : Sport front bumper fascia type

JSOIA0076ZZ


CS

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< BASIC INSPECTION >screw for vertical adjustment. ICC sensor integrated unit adjusts the automatic aiming for the horizontaldirection.)

CAUTIONARY POINT FOR LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENTCAUTION:• For laser beam aiming adjustment, choose a level location where a view can be obtained without any

obstruction as far as 12 m (39 ft) or more in the forward direction. • Adjust laser beam aiming for 5 seconds or more after starting engine. • Adjust the laser beam aiming with CONSULT-III. (The laser beam aiming cannot be adjusted without

CONSULT-III.)• Never enter the vehicle during laser beam aiming adjustment. • Never look directly into the laser beam source (ICC sensor integrated unit body window) during laser

beam aiming adjustment. • Laser beam aiming adjustment is performed at idle. At this time, turn the headlamps OFF.

LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement (Preparation)INFOID:0000000004638195

1.ADVANCE PREPARATION FOR LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT

1. Adjust all tire pressure to the specified value.2. Empty the vehicle. (Remove any luggage from the passenger compartment, luggage room, etc.) 3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position (A/T models) or the shift knob to the neutral position (M/T mod-

els), and release the parking brake.CAUTION:Apply wheel chocks or other tire blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving.

4. Fully fill the fuel tank, and then check that the coolant and oils are filled up to correct level.5. Clean off the ICC sensor integrated unit body window with a soft cloth.

>> Go to CCS-7, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement (Setting TheICC Target Board)".

LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement (Setting The ICC Target Board) INFOID:0000000004638196

DESCRIPTIONAccurate adjustment of the laser beam requires that the ICC target board be accurately positioned. CAUTION:If the laser beam is adjusted with the ICC target board in the incorrect position, the ICC system doesnot function normally.

1.ICC TARGET BOARD HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

1. Attach the triangle scale (2) at 42 mm (1.65 in) (H) below thecenter (A) of the ICC target board (1).

3 : Adjust nut

b : 90°

JPOIA0003ZZ



< BASIC INSPECTION >2. Adjust the ICC target board height to the position aligning the tri-

angle scale (1) upper side tip with the center of laser beam axis(A).

NOTE:• The center of laser beam axis (A) is located at 38 mm (1.5 in) (W)

from the left end of ICC sensor integrated unit and 22 mm (H) (0.87in) from above when viewed from the front of the vehicle.

• To identify the laser beam axis center (A) easily, prepare a piece ofpaper (B) cut to the size of 38 mm (1.5 in) (W) × 22 mm (0.87 in)(H) and attach it on the upper left point of the ICC sensor inte-grated unit (1).

>> GO TO 2.

2.ADJUSTING SIDE POSITION OF ICC TARGET BOARD

1. On the back of the ICC target board, attach the ruler (1) [450mm (17.72 in) or more] or a similar tool squarely from the ICCtarget board center (A) in the left direction.

2 : ICC sensor integrated unit

JPOIA0242ZZ

B : Up-down direction adjusting screw

JPOIA0237ZZ

JPOIA0236ZZ

JSOIA0024ZZ


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< BASIC INSPECTION >2. Suspend a weight from a string (1) attached to its end at the

point (B) rightward from the ICC target board center (A).

>> GO TO 3.

3.SETTING ICC TARGET BOARD

1. Suspend a thread with weight on tip from the center of the front and rear bumpers. Then, mark the centerpoints on the ground as each weight point.

2. Link the front and rear bumpers center points marked on the ground and extend a straight line ahead.Then mark a point 3.9 m (12.8 ft) position ahead of the front bumper. Then, adjust the position of the ICCtarget board so that the weight comes on the top of the marked point [3.9 m (12.8 ft) position ahead of thefront bumper] and face to the vehicle.

3. Adjust the position of the ICC target board (1) so that theextended line (A) that links the center of the rear window glass(the center of the rear window defogger pattern) (B) and the cen-ter of the windshield (the setting part of the room mirror) (C)align with the weight suspended (2) from the ICC target board.

4. Remove the thread suspended to the right side of ICC target board and suspend a thread with weight ontip on the center of the ICC target board. Then mark the point of weight on the ground.

5. Pivot the edge of the ICC target board 25° (a) to either side.

NOTE:Approx. 90 mm (3.54 in) (b) shift rates the 25° (a) movement.

>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK THE ICC TARGET BOARD INSTALLATION POSITION

W [mm (in)]Normal front bumper fascia type : 404 (15.91)Sport front bumper fascia type : 247 (9.72)

JSOIA0016ZZ

JSOIA0025ZZ

1 : ICC target board

2 : String with a weight

C : ICC target board center marking point

JSOIA0026ZZ



< BASIC INSPECTION >Check that the ICC target board (1) is located as shown in the figure.

NOTE:The distance between laser beam axis and ICC target board is 4.0 m (13.0 ft).

>> GO TO 5.

5.CHECK THE ICC TARGET BOARD INSTALLATION AREA

Do not place anything other than ICC target board in the space shown in the figure (view from top).

NOTE:In case the space shown in the figure is not available, cover the side of the ICC target board with a 1400 mm(4.6 ft)-size frosted black board or black cloth.

>> Go to CCS-10, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement (LaserBeam Aiming Adjustment)".

LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement (Laser Beam Aiming Adjustment) INFOID:0000000004638197

DESCRIPTION• Adjust the laser beam aiming in a vertical direction with CONSULT-III as per the following. • The laser beam aiming adjustment in a horizontal direction is performed automatically with CONSULT-III. CAUTION:• Never look directly into the laser beam source (ICC sensor integrated unit body window) during laser

beam aiming adjustment. • Perform all necessary work for laser beam aiming adjustment until the adjustment completes as

shown in the procedure. If the procedure does not complete, the ICC system is inoperable.

1.SET CONSULT-III TO THE LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT MODE

1. ICC target board 2. ICC sensor integrated unit 3. Vehicle

B. Vehicle center L1. 4.0 m (13.0 ft)

W.404 mm (15.91 in) (Normal front bumper fascia type)

247 mm (9.72 in) (Sport front bumper fascia type)

a. 25°

JSOIA0017ZZ

1. ICC target board 2. ICC sensor integrated unit

L1. 6.5 m (21.3 ft) L2. 4.0 m (13.0 ft) W. 3.5 m (11.5 ft)

JSOIA0027ZZ


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< BASIC INSPECTION >1. Start the engine.2. Connect CONSULT-III and select “Work support” of “ICC”. 3. Select “LASER BEAM ADJUST” after the “Work support” screen is displayed. 4. Select “START” after the “LASER BEAM ADJUST” screen is displayed.

NOTE:If the adjustment screen does not appear within approximately 10 seconds after “LASER BEAM ADJUST”is selected, the following causes are possible. • The ICC target board is not installed in the correct position. • Adequate space is not secured around the ICC target board. • The laser beam aiming adjustment exceeds its proper installation range. - Deformation of vehicle body.- Deformation of unit.- Deformation of bracket.• The area is not suitable for the adjustment work.• ICC sensor integrated unit body window is not clean. • The ICC system warning lamp illuminates.

>> GO TO 2.


After “ADJUST THE VERTICAL OF LASER BEAM AIMING” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen, adjust byturning the up-down direction adjusting screw until “U/D CORRECT” becomes ±4 or less. NOTE:• Turn the up-down direction adjusting screw slowly. The value change on display is slower than actual move-

ment of the ICC sensor integrated unit. Wait for 2 seconds every time the up-down direction adjusting screwis turned half a rotation.

• Turning the up-down direction adjusting screw (A) clockwisedirects the laser beam downward (B). The laser beam directsupward (C) when turning up-down direction adjusting screw coun-terclockwise.

CAUTION:Be careful not to cover the ICC sensor integrated unit body win-dow with a hand or the other part of body of worker duringadjustment.

>> GO TO 3.

3.LASER BEAM AIMING CONFIRMATION

1. When the “U/D CORRECT” value becomes ±4 or less, check that no value greater than ±4 appears whenthe vehicle is left with no load on the ICC sensor integrated unit (hand removed) for at least 2 seconds.

2. When “COMPLETED THE VERTICAL AIMING OF LASER BEAM” display appears, touch “END”. CAUTION:Always check that the value of “U/D CORRECT” remains ±4 or less when the ICC sensor inte-grated unit is left alone for at least 2 seconds.

3. Check that “ADJUSTING AUTOMATIC HORIZONTAL LASER BEAM AIMING” is displayed and wait for ashort period of time. (The maximum: Approx 10 seconds).

4. Check that “Normally Completed” is displayed, and select “End” to end “LASER BEAM ADJUST”. CAUTION:Once “LASER BEAM ADJUST” is started with CONSULT-III, always continue the work until thehorizontal laser beam aiming adjustment is completed successfully. If the job is stopped midway,the laser beam aiming is not adjusted and the ICC system cannot operate.

>> LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT ENDACTION TEST

JPOIA0241ZZ




ACTION TEST : Description INFOID:0000000004638198

Always perform the ICC system action test to check that the ICC system operates normally after replacing theICC sensor integrated unit or repairing any ICC system malfunction. CAUTION:Always drive safely when performing the action test.

ACTION TEST : Special Repair Requirement (Vehicle-To-Vehicle Distance Control Mode) INFOID:0000000004638199

NOTE:• When there is no vehicle ahead, drive at the set speed steadily.- The set speed can be selected by the driver between 40 to 144 km/h (25 to 90 MPH).• When there is a vehicle ahead, control to maintain distance from the vehicle ahead, watching its speed.- Maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of own vehicle within the speed range of 40 to 144

km/h (25 to 90 MPH) up to the set speed.CAUTION:Never set the cruise speed exceeding the posted speed limit.

1.CHECK FOR MAIN SWITCH

1. Start the engine.2. Press the MAIN switch (1) (less than 1.5 seconds).

3. Check the ICC system display on the information display to check that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-trol mode is ready for activation.

4. Press the MAIN switch, and check that the ICC system display on the information display turns OFF whenthe ICC system is deactivated.

5. Check that the ICC system display on the information display turns OFF after starting the engine again.

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FOR DISTANCE SWITCH

1. Start the engine.2. Press the MAIN switch (less than 1.5 seconds). 3. Press the DISTANCE switch.

Information display status

MAIN switch indicator (2) : ON

Set distance indicator (3) : Long mode

Own vehicle indicator (4) : ON

Set vehicle speed indicator (5) :“— —”“km/h” (“MPH”)

JSOIA0004ZZ


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< BASIC INSPECTION >4. Check that the set distance indicator changes display in order of: (Long)→(Middle)→(Short).

NOTE:When the MAIN switch is turned ON, initial setting set to (Long).

>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK FOR RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, AND CANCEL SWITCHES

1. Check that RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, and CANCEL switches are operated smoothly.2. Check that switches come up as hand is released from the switches.

>> GO TO 4.

4.SET CHECKING

1. Start the engine.2. Press the MAIN switch (less than 1.5 seconds) and turn the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ON. 3. Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more.4. Push down the SET/COAST switch. 5. Check that the desired speed is set and vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode control starts when

releasing SET/COAST switch.NOTE:The set vehicle speed is indicated on the set vehicle speed indicator in the ICC system display on the informa-tion display.

>> GO TO 5.

5.CHECK FOR INCREASE OF CRUISING SPEED

1. Set the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode at desired speed.2. Check that the set speed increases by 1 km/h (1 MPH) as RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pushed up.NOTE:The maximum set speed of the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is 144 km/h (90 MPH).CAUTION:Never set the cruise speed exceeding the posted speed limit.

>> GO TO 6.

6.CHECK FOR DECREASE OF CRUISING SPEED

1. Set the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode at desired speed. 2. Check that the set speed decreases by 1 km/h (1 MPH) as SET/COAST switch is pushed down.NOTE:• The minimum set speed is approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH).

JSOIA0005GB



< BASIC INSPECTION >• Cancel the control automatically when the vehicle speed is less than approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH) and

when the system does not detect any vehicle ahead.

>> GO TO 7.

7.CHECK FOR CANCELLATION OF VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE

Check that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is cancelled when performing the following opera-tions. • When the brake pedal is depressed after vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is set and the vehicle is

driven. • When the clutch pedal is depressed after vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is set and the vehicle is

driven. (M/T models).• When the selector lever is in the “N” position after vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is set and the

vehicle is driven. (A/T models)• When the MAIN switch is turned OFF after vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is set and the vehicle is

driven. • When the CANCEL switch is pressed after vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is set and the vehicle is

driven.

>> GO TO 8.

8.CHECK FOR RESTORING SPEED THAT IS SET BY VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROLMODE BEFORE CANCELLATION

Check that the vehicle restores the previous speed kept before the system deactivation when performing thefollowing operations. • Drive the vehicle when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is set and depress the brake pedal to

cancel the control. Check that the vehicle restores the previous vehicle speed kept before the system deac-tivation when pushing up the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.

• Drive the vehicle when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is set and depress the clutch pedal (withthe shift knob at any of the 1st to 6th gear positions) to cancel the control. Check that the vehicle restores theprevious vehicle speed kept before the system deactivation when pushing up the RESUME/ACCELERATEswitch. (M/T models)

• Drive the vehicle when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is set and shift the selector lever to the“N” position to cancel the control. Check that the vehicle restores the previous vehicle speed kept before thesystem deactivation when shifting the selector lever to the “D” position and pushing up the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. (A/T models)

• Drive the vehicle when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is set and press the CANCEL switch tocancel the control. Check that the vehicle restores the previous vehicle speed kept before the system deac-tivation when pushing up the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.

>> INSPECTION END

ACTION TEST : Special Repair Requirement [Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode] INFOID:0000000004638200

NOTE:• For cruising at a preset speed.- The set speed can be selected by the driver between 40 to 144 km/h (25 to 90 MPH).CAUTION:Never set the cruise speed exceeding the posted speed limit.

1.CHECK FOR MAIN SWITCH

1. Start the engine.


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< BASIC INSPECTION >2. Press the MAIN switch (1) (1.5 seconds or more).

3. Check that the ICC system display on the information display turns on and the display is ready for activa-tion.

4. Press the MAIN switch, and check that the ICC system display on the information display turns OFF whenthe ICC system is deactivated.

5. Check that the ICC system display on the information display turns OFF after starting the engine again.

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FOR RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, AND CANCEL SWITCHES

1. Check that RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, and CANCEL switches are operated smoothly.2. Check that switches come up as hand is released from the switches.

>> GO TO 3.

3.SET CHECKING

1. Start the engine.2. Press the MAIN switch (1.5 seconds or more) and turn the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

to ON. 3. Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more. 4. Push down the SET/COAST switch. 5. Check that the desired speed is set and conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode control starts

when releasing SET/COAST switch. NOTE:• The set vehicle speed is not displayed in the ICC system display on the information display. • Display the set status in the ICC system display on the information display.

>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK FOR INCREASE OF CRUISING SPEED

1. Set the vehicle speed to any desired speed, and drive the vehicle.2. Check that the set speed increases by 1.6 km/h (1 MPH) as RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pushed

up. NOTE:• The maximum set speed is 144 km/h (90 MPH).• The set vehicle speed increases while pushing up the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.CAUTION:Never set the cruise speed exceeding the posted speed limit.

>> GO TO 5.

5.CHECK FOR DECREASE OF CRUISING SPEED

1. Set the vehicle speed to any desired speed, and drive the vehicle.2. Check that the set speed decreases by 1.6 km/h (1 MPH) as SET/COAST switch is pushed down.NOTE:• The minimum set speed is 40 km/h (25 MPH).• The set vehicle speed decreases while pressing down the SET/COAST switch.

Information display status

MAIN switch indicator (2) : ON

JSOIA0006ZZ



< BASIC INSPECTION >• Cancel the control automatically when the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 32 km/h (20

MPH).

>> GO TO 6.

6.CHECK FOR CANCELLATION OF CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE

Check that the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is cancelled when performing the followingoperations. • When the brake pedal is depressed after the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is set and the

vehicle is driven. • When the clutch pedal is depressed after the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is set and the

vehicle is driven. (M/T models)• When the selector lever is in the “N” position after the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is set

and the vehicle is driven. (A/T models)• When the MAIN switch is turned OFF after the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is set and the

vehicle is driven. • When the CANCEL switch is pressed after the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is set and the

vehicle is driven.

>> GO TO 7.

7.CHECK FOR RESTORING SPEED THAT IS SET BY CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CON-TROL MODE BEFORE CANCELLATION

Check that the vehicle restores the previous speed kept before the system deactivation when performing thefollowing operations. • Drive the vehicle when the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is set and depress the brake

pedal to cancel the control. Check that the vehicle restores the previous vehicle speed kept before the sys-tem deactivation when pushing up the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch at the vehicle speed approximately40 km/h (25 MPH) or more.

• Drive the vehicle when the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is set and depress the clutchpedal (with the shift knob at any of the 1st to 6th gear positions) to cancel the control. Check that the vehiclerestores the previous vehicle speed kept before the system deactivation when pushing up the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch at the vehicle speed approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more. (M/T models)

• Drive the vehicle when the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is set and shift the selector leveris in the “N” position to cancel the control. Check that the vehicle restores the previous vehicle speed keptbefore the system deactivation when shifting the selector lever is in the “D” position and pushing up theRESUME/ACCELERATE switch at the vehicle speed of approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more. (A/Tmodels)

• Drive the vehicle when the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is set and press the CANCELswitch to cancel the control. Check that the vehicle restores the previous vehicle speed kept before the sys-tem deactivation when pushing up the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch at the vehicle speed of approxi-mately 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more.

>> INSPECTION END


CS

ICC[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONICC

System Diagram INFOID:0000000004638201

System Description INFOID:0000000004638202

DESCRIPTION

JSOIA0113GB


[ICC]ICC

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle trav-eling in front of own vehicle according to that vehicle's speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed whenthe road ahead is clear.The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes:CAUTION:Never set the cruise speed exceeding the posted speed limit.

Vehicle-to-vehicle Distance Control ModeFor maintaining a selected distance between own vehicle and the vehicle in front of own vehicle up to the pre-set speed. Refer to CCS-22, "System Description".

Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control ModeFor cruising at a preset speed. Refer to CCS-31, "System Description".NOTE:In the Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode, a warning chime will not sound to warn driver if ownvehicle are too close to the vehicle ahead.WARNING:Always drive carefully and attentively when using either cruise control mode. To avoid serious injuryor death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emer-gency situations. Do not use cruise control except in appropriate rode and traffic conditions.

Brake Assist (With Preview Function)Brake Assist (With Preview Function) share the systems and components with ICC system. Refer to BRC-106,"System Description".

ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ITEM

Input Signal Item

Transmit unit Signal name Description

ECM

Accelerator pedal position signalReceives the accelerator pedal position signal from ECM via CAN communication.

ICC steering switch signal

MAIN switch signal

Receives the ICC steering switch signal from ECM via CAN commu-nication.

SET/COAST switch signal

CANCEL switch signal

RESUME/ACCELER-ATE switch signal

DISTANCE switch sig-nal

ICC brake switch signalReceives the ICC brake switch signal from ECM via CAN communi-cation.

Stop lamp switch signalReceives the stop lamp switch signal from ECM via CAN communi-cation.

Closed throttle position signalReceives the closed throttle position signal from ECM via CAN com-munication.

Engine speed signalReceives the engine speed signal from ECM via CAN communica-tion.

Park/neutral position switch signal*1Receives park/neutral position switch signal from ECM with CAN communication.

TCM*2

Shift position signal Receives the shift position signal from TCM via CAN communication.

Output shaft revolution signalReceives the output shaft revolution signal from TCM via CAN com-munication.

Current gear position signalReceives the current gear position signal from TCM via CAN com-munication.

Input speed signal Receives the input speed signal from TCM via CAN communication.


CS

ICC[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


*1: M/T models

*2: A/T models

Output Signal Item

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

Vehicle speed signalReceives the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.

Brake pressure control signalReceives the brake pressure control signal from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.

Stop lamp switch signalReceives the stop lamp switch signal from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.

BCM Front wiper request signalReceives the front wiper request signal from BCM via CAN commu-nication.

Transmit unit Signal name Description

Reception unit Signal name Description

ECM ICC operation signal Transmits the ICC operation signal to ECM via CAN communication.

Combination meter (through unified meter and A/C amp.)

Meter display signal

Own vehicle indicator signal

Transmits the meter display signal to the combination meter (through unified meter and A/C amp.) via CAN communication.

Vehicle ahead detection indicator signal

Set vehicle speed indi-cator signal

Set distance indicator signal

MAIN switch indicator signal

SET switch indicator signal

ICC warning lamp signalTransmits the ICC warning lamp signal to the combination meter (through unified meter and A/C amp.) via CAN communication.

Buzzer output signalTransmits the buzzer output signal to the combination meter (through unified meter and A/C amp.) via CAN communication.


Deceleration degree commandment value signal

Transmits the deceleration degree commandment value signal to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.

ICC brake hold relay

ICC brake hold relay drive signalThe ICC sensor integrated unit outputs the ICC brake hold relay drive signal and operates the ICC brake hold relay.


[ICC]ICC


Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004638203

1. Information display, ICC system warning lamp

2. Buzzer (ICC warning chime) 3. ICC steering switch

4. ECM 5. ICC sensor integrated unit 6. ICC brake hold relay

7. ICC brake switch 8. Stop lamp switch 9. ICC clutch switch

JSOIA0078GB


CS

ICC[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


Component Description INFOID:0000000004638204

×: Applicable

*1: Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

*2: Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

*3: Brake Assist (With Preview Function)

10. ABS actuator and electric unit (con-trol unit)

A. On the combination meter B. Back of combination meter C. Steering wheel (RH)

D. Behind the glove box E. Front bumper (LH) F. Engine room (LH)

G. Upper side of brake pedal H. Upper side clutch pedal

ComponentFunction Description

Description*1 *2 *3

ICC sensor integrated unit × × × Refer to CCS-43, "Description".

ECM × × × Refer to CCS-70, "Description".


× × × Refer to CCS-50, "Description".

BCM × Transmits the front wiper request signal to ICC sensor inte-grated unit via CAN communication.

TCM × × Refer to CCS-95, "Description".

Unified meter and A/C amp. × × ×

Receives the meter display signal, buzzer output signal, and ICC warning lamp signal from ICC sensor integrated unit via CAN communication and transmits them to the combination meter via the communication line.

Combination meter × × ×

Performs the following operations using the signals received from the unified meter and A/C amp. via the communication line. • Displays the ICC system operation status using the meter

display signal.• Illuminates the ICC system warning lamp using the ICC

warning lamp signal. • Operates the buzzer (ICC warning chime) using the buzzer

output signal.

ICC brake switch × × ×

Refer to CCS-52, "Description". Stop lamp switch × × ×

ICC clutch switch × × ×

ICC brake hold relay × × Refer to CCS-64, "Description".

Park/neutral position switch × × Refer to CCS-103, "Description".


[ICC]VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE FUNCTION


VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE FUNCTION



FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

JSOIA0113GB


CS

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE FUNCTION[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system automatically main-tains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of own vehicle according to that vehicle's speed (upto the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear.With ICC system, the driver can maintain the same speed as other vehicles without the constant need toadjust the set speed as driver would with a normal cruise control system.The following items are controlled in the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.• When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode maintains the

speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 40 and 144 km/h (25 and 90 MPH).• When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode adjusts the speed to

maintain the distance, selected by driver, from a vehicle ahead. The adjusting speed range is betweenapproximately 32 km/h (20 MPH) and up to the set speed.

• When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-trol mode accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.

NOTE:When the accelerator pedal is depressed, the brake operation and the warning are not performed by the ICCsystem.

OPERATION DESCRIPTIONQuickly push (less than 1.5seconds) and release the MAIN switch ON.The MAIN switch indicator, set distance indicator, own vehicle indicator, and set vehicle speed indicator comeon and ICC system is set to a standby state.ICC sensor integrated unit performs the control as per the following:

Set ConditionUnder a standby state, pushing down the SET/COAST switch will start system control.• When vehicle speed is between approximately 40 km/h and 144 km/h (25 MPH and 90 MPH).If the system is cancelled by conditions 1-6 below, the system will resume control at the last set cruising speedby pushing up the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.NOTE:• When the SET/COAST switch is pushed under the following condi-

tions, the system cannot be set and the set speed indicator willblink for approximately 2 seconds.

- When traveling below 40 km/h (25 MPH).- When the brakes are operated by the driver.- When the selector lever is not in the “D”, “DS” position or manual

mode. (A/T models)- When the clutch is operated by the driver. (M/T models)- When the shift knob is shifted in the neutral position. (M/ T models)- When the front wipers are operating at LO or HI.

Constant speed

Comparing the set vehicle speed with the current vehicle speed, transmit the command to ECM via CAN communication to reach the set vehicle speed, and controls the electric throttle control actuator.

Decelera-tion

When a vehicle ahead (slower than driver set vehicle speed) appears or when a vehicle ahead slows down, the system controls the electric throttle control actuator into the close direction and decelerates the vehicle. If greater deceleration is necessary, the system transmits the deceleration degree commandment value signal to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication and operates the brake.

FollowingThe system controls the electric throttle control actuator and the brake fluid pressure to keep the proper distance between the vehicles according to the vehicle speed change of the vehicle ahead.

Accelera-tion

When a vehicle ahead is not detected because of it changes lanes or own vehicle changes lanes during the following driving, the system controls the electric throttle control actuator in the open direction and accelerates the vehicle to the set vehicle speed slowly.

JPOIA0222ZZ



< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >• When the SET/COAST switch is pushed under the following condi-

tions, the system cannot be set. A warning chime will sound andthe set speed indicator and own vehicle indicator will blink.

- When the snow mode switch is ON (To use the ICC system, turnOFF the snow mode switch, push the MAIN switch to turn OFF theICC system and reset the ICC system by pushing the MAIN switchagain.)

- When the VDC is OFF (To use the ICC system, turn ON the VDCsystem, push the MAIN switch to turn OFF the ICC system andreset the ICC system by pushing the MAIN switch again.)

- When ABS or VDC (including the TCS) operates- When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight)- When the wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no longer spinning, push the

MAIN switch to turn OFF the ICC system and reset the ICC system by pushing the MAIN switch again.)

Cancel Conditions1. When CANCEL switch is pressed.2. When brake pedal is depressed.3. When clutch pedal is depressed. (M/T models)4. When the selector lever is not in the “D”, “DS” position or manual mode. (A/T models)5. When the shift knob is shifted in the neutral position. (M/T models)6. When the vehicle speed falls below approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH).7. When the front wipers are operating at LO or HI.8. When the snow mode switch is turned ON.9. When ABS or VDC (including the TCS) operates.10. When the MAIN switch is turned OFF.11. When a wheel slips.12. When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight).13. When the VDC is turned OFF.14. When the system malfunction occurs.

OPERATION AND DISPLAY

ICC Steering Switch

JPOIA0223ZZ

1. CANCEL switch 2. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch 3. SET/COAST switch

4. DISTANCE switch 5. MAIN switch

No. Switch name Description

1 CANCEL switch Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.

2 RESUME/ACCELERATE switchResumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.• Push and hold the switch to increase the set speed by 5 km/h (5 MPH).• Push then quickly release the switch to increase the set speed by 1 km/h (1 MPH).

JSOIA0010ZZ


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


ICC System Display (On The Information Display)

System Control Condition DisplayQuickly push (less than 1.5 seconds) and release the MAIN switch ON.The MAIN switch indicator (cruise indicator), set distance indicator, own vehicle indicator, and set vehiclespeed indicator come on and ICC system is set to a standby state.

3 SET/COAST switchSets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally.• Push and hold the switch to decrease the set speed by 5 km/h (5 MPH).• Push then quickly release the switch to decrease the set speed by 1 km/h (1 MPH)

4 DISTANCE switch Changes the following distance from: Long, Middle, Short.

5 MAIN switch Master switch to activate the system (Press for less than 1.5 seconds).

No. Switch name Description

JSOIA0011ZZ

No. Display item Description

1 ICC system warning lamp Indicates that a malfunction occurs in the ICC system.

2 MAIN switch indicator Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON (ICC system ON).

3 Vehicle ahead detection indicator Indicates whether it detects a vehicle ahead.

4 Set distance indicator Indicates the selected distance between vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch.

5 Own vehicle indicator Indicates the own vehicle.

6 Set vehicle speed indicator Indicates the set vehicle speed.

Condition Display on ICC system display

Standby mode

JPOIA0141ZZ




Control modeWithout a vehicle ahead

Set vehicle distance (Long)

Set vehicle distance (Middle)

Set vehicle distance (Short)

When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed


JPOIA0142ZZ

JPOIA0143ZZ

JPOIA0144ZZ

JPOIA0145ZZ


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


Approach Warning DisplayIf own vehicle comes closer to a vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehiclecuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing thebrake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:• The chime sounds.• The vehicle ahead detection indicator and set distance indicator blink.The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Someexamples are:• When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.• When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.• When a vehicle cuts in at near own vehicle.The warning chime will not sound when own vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.The warning chime will not sound when the accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the ICC sensor detects somereflectors which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes or on the side of the road.This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.The ICC sensor may detect these reflectors when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, hilly roads or whenentering or exiting a curve.The ICC sensor may also detect reflectors on narrow roads or in road construction zones.In these cases driver will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of own vehicle.Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in thelane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

Control modeWith a vehicle ahead

Set vehicle distance (Long)

Set vehicle distance (Middle)

Set vehicle distance (Short)

When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed


JPOIA0146ZZ

JPOIA0147ZZ

JPOIA0148ZZ

JPOIA0149ZZ




Warning Lamp and Automatic Cancellation Display

NOTE:

When the ICC system is automatically cancelled, the cancellation condition can be displayed on “WORK SUPPORT” of CONSULT-III(ICC).


When own vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead and it is judged that the distance between the vehicles is not sufficient

JPOIA0150ZZ

Condition Description Display on ICC system display

Warning display

• When the VDC is turned OFF• When the VDC or ABS (in-

cluding the TCS) operates• When a wheel slips• When the snow mode switch

is turned ON• When driving into a strong

light (i.e., sunlight)

A chime sounds and the control is automatically canceled.NOTE:When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system OFF using the MAIN switch.Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.

When the sensor window is dirty, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead.

A chime sounds and the control is automatically canceled.NOTE:Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine OFF.Clean the sensor window with a soft cloth and then perform the settings again.

When the ICC system is mal-functioning

A chime sounds and the control is automatically canceled.NOTE:Turn the engine OFF and restart engine. If there is no malfunction, it is possible to set the system.

Automatic cancella-tion dis-

play

• When brake pedal is de-pressed

• When clutch pedal is de-pressed (M/T models)

• When CANCEL switch is pressed

• When the vehicle speed falls below approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH)

• When the selector lever is not in “D”, ”DS” position or manual mode (A/T models)

• When the shift knob is shifted in the neutral position (M/T models)

• When the front wipers are op-erating at LO or HI

A chime sounds and the control is automatically canceled.NOTE:• The system will be in a standby, after the control

is automatically cancelled.• A chime sounds when the control is automati-

cally canceled, except when brake pedal is de-pressed or when CANCEL switch is pressed.

JPOIA0151ZZ

JPOIA0152ZZ

JPOIA0153ZZ

JPOIA0154ZZ


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C







JSOIA0078GB





×: Applicable









Description*1 *2 *3













output signal.







CS

CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE FUNCTION[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE FUNCTION



FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

JSOIA0113GB


[ICC]CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE FUNCTION

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >This mode allows driving at a speed between 40 to 144 km/h (25 to 90 MPH) without keeping foot on theaccelerator pedal.NOTE:In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn driver if ownvehicle are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.

OPERATION DESCRIPTIONTo turn ON the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the MAIN switch for longer thanapproximately 1.5 seconds when ICC system is OFF.When pushing the MAIN switch ON, the ICC system display and the MAIN switch indicator are displayed onthe information display.After hold the MAIN switch ON for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display goes out.The MAIN switch indicator stays lit and brings the system to standby state.NOTE:To turn on the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode again, turn OFF the system and quickly push (lessthan 1.5 seconds) the MAIN switch.ICC sensor integrated unit performs the control as per the following:

Set ConditionWhen the system is under a standby state and the vehicle speed is between approximately 40 to 144 km/h (25to 90 MPH), pushing the SET/COAST switch will start system control.If the system is cancelled by conditions 1-7 below, the system will resume control at the last set cruising speedby pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.

Cancel conditions1. When CANCEL switch is pressed.2. When brake pedal depressed.3. When clutch pedal depressed. (M/T models)4. When the vehicle speed falls below approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH).5. When the vehicle slows down more than 13 km/h (8 MPH) below the set speed.6. When the selector lever is not in the “D”, “DS” position or manual mode. (A/T models)7. When the shift knob is shifted in the neutral position. (M/T models)8. When the MAIN switch is turned OFF.9. When VDC (including the TCS) operates.10. When a wheel slips.11. When the system malfunction occurs.

OPERATION AND DISPLAY

ICC Steering Switch

Constant speed

Comparing the set vehicle speed with the current vehicle speed, transmits the command to ECM via CAN communication to reach the set vehicle speed, and controls the electronic throttle control actuator.

JPOIA0266ZZ


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


ICC System Display (On The Information Display)

System Control Condition DisplayPush and hold the MAIN switch for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. This mode will be in a standbystate for setting.

Warning and Automatic Cancellation Display

1. CANCEL switch 2. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch 3. SET/COAST switch

4. MAIN switch

No. Description Function

1 CANCEL switch Deactivates system without erasing set speed.

2 RESUME/ACCELERATE switch Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

3 SET/COAST switch Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally.

4 MAIN switch Master switch to activate the system (Press for more than 1.5 seconds).

JSOIA0012ZZ

No. Description Function

1 ICC system warning lamp Indicates that a malfunction occurs in the ICC system.

2 MAIN switch indicator Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON (ICC system ON).

3 SET switch indicator Indicates that the set conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is controlled.


Standby mode

Control mode

JPOIA0158ZZ

JPOIA0156ZZ




NOTE:

When the ICC system is automatically cancelled, the cancellation condition can be displayed on “WORK SUPPORT” of CONSULT-III(ICC).

Condition Description Display on ICC system display

Warning displayWhen the ICC system is malfunc-tioning

A chime sounds and the control is automatically canceled. NOTE:Turn the engine OFF and restart engine. If there is no malfunction, it is possible to set the system.

System cancel display

• When brake pedal is depressed• When pressing CANCEL switch• When clutch pedal depressed

(M/T models)• When the vehicle speed falls be-

low approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH)

• When the vehicle slows down more than 13 km/h (8 MPH) be-low the set speed

• When the selector lever is not in the “D”, “DS” position or manual mode (A/T models)

• When the shift knob is shifted in the neutral position (M/T mod-els)

• When VDC (including the TCS) operates

• When a wheel slips

A chime sounds and the control is automatically canceled. NOTE:• The system will be in a standby,

after the control is automatically cancelled.

• A chime sounds when the con-trol is automatically canceled, except when brake pedal is de-pressed or when CANCEL switch is pressed.

JPOIA0157ZZ

JPOIA0158ZZ


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C







JSOIA0078GB





×: Applicable









Description*1 *2 *3













output signal.







CS

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT)[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT)

Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000004638213

The DTC is displayed on the information display by operating the ICC steering switch.

ON BOARD SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DIAGRAM

ON BOARD SELF-DIAGNOSIS OPERATION PROCEDURECAUTION:Start condition of on board self-diagnosis• MAIN switch OFF• Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH)1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Start the engine.3. Wait for 5 seconds after starting the engine. Push up the

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch 5 times and push down theSET/COAST switch 5 times within 10 seconds. NOTE:If the above operation cannot be performed within 10 secondsafter waiting for 5 seconds after starting the engine, repeat theprocedure from step 1.

4. The DTC is displayed on the set vehicle speed indicator (1) on the ICC system display on the informationdisplay when the on board self-diagnosis starts. Refer to CCS-113, "DTC Index".

NOTE:• It displays for up to 5 minutes and then stops.

JPOIA0189GB

PKIB8371E

JSOIA0008GB


[ICC]DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT)

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >• If multiple malfunctions exist, up to 3 DTCs can be stored in memory at the most, and the most recent

one is displayed first.

WHEN THE ON BOARD SELF-DIAGNOSIS DOES NOT STARTIf the on board self-diagnosis does not start, check the following items.

HOW TO ERASE ON BOARD SELF-DIAGNOSIS1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Start the engine, and then start the on board self-diagnosis. 3. Press the CANCEL switch 5 times, and then press the DIS-

TANCE switch 5 times under the condition that the on boardself-diagnosis starts. NOTE:• Complete the operation within 10 seconds after pressing the

CANCEL switch first. • If the operation is not completed within 10 seconds, repeat the

procedure from step 1. 4. DTC 55 is displayed after erasing.

NOTE:DTCs for existing malfunction can not be erased.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF, and finish the diagnosis.

CONSULT-III Function (ICC) INFOID:0000000004638214

DESCRIPTIONCONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication using ICC sensor integrated unit.

Assumed abnormal part Inspection item

ICC system display

Combination meter malfunctionCheck that the self-diagnosis function of the combina-tion meter operates. Refer to MWI-35, "Diagnosis De-scription".

Unified meter and A/C amp. malfunctionCheck power supply and ground circuit of unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-50, "UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure".

Communication error of the combination meter and the unified meter and A/C amp.

Start the self-diagnosis of the unified meter and A/C amp. and then check the self-diagnosis results. Refer to MWI-99, "DTC Index".

ICC steering switch malfunctionPerform the inspection for DTC “C1A06”. Refer to CCS-60, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Harness malfunction between ICC steering switch and ECM

ECM malfunction

ICC sensor integrated unit malfunction

• Check power supply and ground circuit of ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-102, "Diagnosis Proce-dure".

• Perform SELF-DIAGNOSIS for “ICC” with CONSULT-III, and then check the malfunctioning parts. Refer to CCS-113, "DTC Index".

PKIB8373E

Diagnosis mode Description

Work Support• It can monitor the adjustment direction indication in order to perform the laser beam aiming operation

smoothly. • Displays causes of automatic cancellation of the ICC system.

Self Diagnostic Result Displays malfunctioning system memorized in ICC sensor integrated unit.

Data Monitor Displays real-time input/output data of ICC sensor integrated unit.

Active Test Enables operation check of electrical loads by transmitting driving signal to them.

Ecu Identification Displays ICC sensor integrated unit part number.

CAN Diag Support Monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


WORK SUPPORT

Display Items for The Cause of Automatic CancellationNOTE:• Causes of the maximum five cancellations (system cancel) are displayed.• The displayed cancellation causes display the number of the ignition switch ON/OFF up to 254. It is fixed to

254 if it is over 254. It returns to 0 when the same cancellation cause is detected again. ×: Applicable

Laser Beam AdjustRefer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description".

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTRefer to CCS-113, "DTC Index".

DATA MONITOR

Work support items Description

CAUSE OF AUTO-CANCEL Displays causes of automatic cancellation of the ICC system.

LASER BEAM ADJUST Outputs laser beam, calculates dislocation of the beam, and indicates adjustment direction.

Cause of cancellationVehicle-to-vehi-

cle distance con-trol mode

Conven-tional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode

Description

OPERATING WIPER × The wiper operates at HI or LO

OPERATING ABS × ABS function was operated

OPERATING TCS × × TCS function was operated

OPERATING VDC × × VDC function was operated

ECM CIRCUIT × × ECM did not permit ICC operation

OPE SW VOLT CIRC × × The ICC steering switch input voltage is not within standard range

LASER SUNBEAM × Intense light such as sunlight entered ICC sensor integrated unit light sensing part

LASER TEMP × Temperature around ICC sensor integrated unit became low

OP SW DOUBLE TOUCH × × ICC steering switches were pressed at the same time

WHL SPD ELEC NOISE × × Wheel speed sensor signal caught electromagnetic noise

VDC/TCS OFF SW × VDC OFF switch was pressed

VHCL SPD UNMATCH × × Wheel speed became different from A/T vehicle speed

SNOW MODE SW × Snow mode switch was pressed

TIRE SLIP × × Wheel slipped

IGN LOW VOLT × × Power supply voltage became low

WHEEL SPD UNMATCH × × The wheel speeds of 4 wheels are out of the specified values

VHCL SPD DOWN × × Vehicle speed becomes 32 km/h (20 MPH) and under

CAN COMM ERROR × × ICC sensor integrated unit received an abnormal signal with CAN com-munication

ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC × × An abnormal condition occurs in VDC/TCS/ABS system

ECD CIRCUIT × An abnormal condition occurs in ECD system

ENG SPEED DOWN × × Engine speed became extremely low while controlling ICC system

ASCD VHCL SPD DTAC × Vehicle speed is detached from set vehicle speed

ASCD DOUBLE COMD × Cancel switch and operation switch are detected simultaneously

NO RECORD × × －



< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >×: Applicable

Monitored item[Unit]

MAIN SIGNAL

Description

MAIN SW[On/Off]

× Indicates [On/Off] status as judged from ICC steering switch signal (ECM transmits ICC steering switch signal through CAN communication).

SET/COAST SW[On/Off]


CANCEL SW[On/Off]


RESUME/ACC SW[On/Off]


DISTANCE SW[On/Off]

Indicates [On/Off] status as judged from ICC steering switch signal (ECM transmits ICC steering switch signal through CAN communication).

CRUISE OPE[On/Off]

× Indicates whether controlling or not (ON means “controlling”).

BRAKE SW[On/Off]

× Indicates [On/Off] status as judged from ICC brake switch signal (ECM transmits ICC brake switch signal through CAN communication).

STOP LAMP SW[On/Off]

× Indicates [On/Off] status as judged from stop lamp switch signal (ECM transmits stop lamp switch signal through CAN communication).

IDLE SW[On/Off]

Indicates [On/Off] status of idle switch read from ICC sensor integrated unit through CAN communication (ECM transmits On/Off status through CAN communication).

SET DISTANCE[Short/Mid/Long]

× Indicates set distance memorized in ICC sensor integrated unit.

CRUISE LAMP[On/Off]

× Indicates [On/Off] status of MAIN switch indicator output.

OWN VHCL[On/Off]

Indicates [On/Off] status of own vehicle indicator output.

VHCL AHEAD[On/Off]

Indicates [On/Off] status of vehicle ahead detection indicator output.

ICC WARNING[On/Off]

Indicates [On/Off] status of ICC system warning lamp output.

VHCL SPEED SE[km/h] or [mph]

×Indicates vehicle speed calculated from ICC sensor integrated unit through CAN communication [ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) transmits vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) through CAN communication].

SET VHCL SPD[km/h] or [mph]

× Indicates set vehicle speed memorized in ICC sensor integrated unit.

BUZZER O/P[On/Off]

Indicates [On/Off] status of ICC warning chime output.

THRTL SENSOR[deg]

× NOTE:The item is displayed, but it is not monitored.

ENGINE RPM[rpm]

Indicates engine speed read from ICC sensor integrated unit through CAN communi-cation (ECM transmits engine speed through CAN communication).

WIPER SW[Off/Low/High]

Indicates wiper [Off/Low/High] status (BCM transmits front wiper request signal through CAN communication).

YAW RATE[deg/s]

NOTE:The item is displayed, but it is not monitored.

STP LMP DRIVE[On/Off]

× Indicates [On/Off] status of ICC brake hold relay drive output.

D RANGE SW[On/Off]

Indicates [On/Off] status of “D” or “DS” or “M” positions read from ICC sensor integrat-ed unit through CAN communication; ON when position “D” or “DS” or “M” (TCM transmits shift position signal through CAN communication).

NP RANGE SW[On/Off]

Indicates shift position signal read from ICC sensor integrated unit through CAN com-munication (TCM transmits shift position signal through CAN communication).

PKB SW[Off]

NOTE:The item is displayed, but it is not monitored.


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


ACTIVE TESTCAUTION:• Never perform “Active Test” while driving the vehicle.• The “Active Test” cannot be performed when the ICC system warning lamp is illuminated. • Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then perform the test.

METER LAMPNOTE:The test can be performed only when the engine is running.

STOP LAMP

PWR SUP MONI[V]

× Indicates IGN voltage input by ICC sensor integrated unit.

VHCL SPD AT[km/h] or [mph]

Indicates vehicle speed calculated from A/T vehicle speed sensor read from ICC sen-sor integrated unit through CAN communication (TCM transmits A/T vehicle speed sensor signal through CAN communication).

THRTL OPENING[%]

×Indicates throttle position read from ICC sensor integrated unit through CAN commu-nication (ECM transmits accelerator pedal position signal through CAN communica-tion).

GEAR[1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7]

Indicates A/T gear position read from ICC sensor integrated unit through CAN com-munication (TCM transmits current gear position signal through CAN communica-tion).

CLUTCH SW SIG[On/Off]

× Indicates [On/Off] status as judged from ICC brake switch signal (ECM transmits ICC brake switch signal through CAN communication). (M/T models)

NP SW SIG[On/Off]

×Indicates [On/Off] status as judged from park/neutral position switch signal (ECM transmits park/neutral position switch signal through CAN communication). (M/T models)

MODE SIG[OFF, ICC, ASCD]

Indicates the active mode from ICC or ASCD [conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode].

SET DISP IND[On/Off]

Indicates [On/Off] status of SET switch indicator output.

DISTANCE[m]

Indicates the distance from the vehicle ahead.

RELATIVE SPD[m/s]

Indicates the relative speed of the vehicle ahead.

Monitored item[Unit]

MAIN SIGNAL

Description

Test item Description

METER LAMPThe ICC system warning lamp, MAIN switch indicator, and SET switch indicator can be illuminated by ON/OFF operations as necessary.

STOP LAMPThe ICC brake hold relay can be operated by ON/OFF operations as necessary, and the stop lamp can be illuminated.

ICC BUZZER The ICC warning chime can sound by ON/OFF operations as necessary.

Test itemOper-ation

Description• MAIN switch indicator• SET switch indicator• ICC system warning lamp

METER LAMP

OffStops transmitting the signals below to end the test.• Meter display signal• ICC warning lamp signal

OFF

On

Transmits the following signals to the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication. • Meter display signal• ICC warning lamp signal

ON




ICC BUZZER

Test itemOper-ation

Description Stop lamp

STOP LAMPOff

Stops transmitting the ICC brake hold relay drive signal be-low to end the test.

OFF

On Transmits the ICC brake hold relay drive signal. ON

Test item Operation DescriptionICC warning chime operation

sound

ICC BUZZER

Test StartTransmits the buzzer output signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication.

Beep sound

ResetStops transmitting the buzzer output signal below to end the test.

—

End Return to the “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. —


CS

C1A00 CONTROL UNIT[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISC1A00 CONTROL UNIT


ICC sensor integrated unit function description• It detects the reflected light from the vehicle ahead by irradiating a laser forward. It calculates the vehicle dis-

tance from and relative speed with the vehicle ahead depending on the detected signal. • It calculates the target vehicle distance and the target vehicle speed depending on the signals from various

sensors and switches, outputs the engine torque demand to ECM via CAN communication, and outputs thedeceleration degree commandment value signal to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CANcommunication.

DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004638216

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1. Start the engine.2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 3. Check if the “C1A00” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A00” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-43, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004638217

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Check if any DTC other than “C1A00” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to

CCS-113, "DTC Index".NO >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".

Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004638218

DESCRIPTIONPerform the action test after adjusting the laser beam aiming of ICC sensor integrated unit when the followingoperation is performed. • Removal and installation of ICC sensor integrated unit• Replacement of ICC sensor integrated unit

SPECIAL REPAIR REQUIREMENT

1.LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT OF ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT

Adjust the laser beam aiming of the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMINGADJUSTMENT : Description".

>> GO TO 2.

DTC(On board dis-

play)Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible causes

C1A00(0)

CONTROL UNITICC sensor integrated unit internal malfunc-tion

ICC sensor integrated unit


[ICC]C1A00 CONTROL UNIT


2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM

1. Erase the “Self Diagnostic Result”, and then perform “All DTC Reading” again after performing the actiontest. (Refer to CCS-12, "ACTION TEST : Description" for action test.)

2. Check that the ICC system is normal.

>> WORK END


CS

C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2


The ICC sensor integrated unit controls the system with the ignition power supply.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1. Start the engine.2. Turn the MAIN switch of ICC system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 4. Check if the “C1A01” or “C1A02” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of

“ICC”. Is “C1A01” or “C1A02” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-45, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".


1.CHECK ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power supply and ground circuit of ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-102, "Diagnosis Proce-dure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.






>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM


DTC(On board dis-

play)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition Possible causes

C1A01(1)

POWER SUPPLY CIR

ICC sensor integrated unit power supply voltage is excessively low (less than 8 V). • Connector, harness, fuse

• ICC sensor integrated unitC1A02(2)

POWER SUPPLY CIR 2

ICC sensor integrated unit power supply voltage is excessively high (more than 19 V).


[ICC]C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >2. Check that the ICC system is normal.

>> WORK END


CS

C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR


The ICC sensor integrated unit receives the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) from ABS actuator and elec-tric unit (control unit) and the A/T vehicle speed sensor signal (output shaft revolution signal) from TCM viaCAN communication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:If DTC “C1A03” is detected along with DTC “U1000” or “C1A04”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000” or “C1A04”. • Refer to CCS-99, "DTC Logic" for DTC “U1000”.• Refer to CCS-50, "DTC Logic" for DTC “C1A04”.



1. Start the engine.2. Turn the MAIN switch of ICC system ON. 3. Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more.

CAUTION:Always drive safely.

4. Stop the vehicle.5. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 6. Check if the “C1A03” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A03” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-47, "Diagnosis Procedure (A/T Models)" or CCS-48, "Diagnosis Procedure (M/T

Models)".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

Diagnosis Procedure (A/T Models) INFOID:0000000004638225


Check if “C1A04” or “U1000” is detected other than “C1A03” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to

CCS-113, "DTC Index".NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DATA MONITOR

1. Start the engine.2. Drive the vehicle. 3. Check that the value of “VHCL SPD AT” is almost the same as the value of “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA

MONITOR” of “ICC”. CAUTION:Be careful of the vehicle speed.

DTC(On board display)



C1A03(3)

VHCL SPEED SE CIRC

If the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and the A/T vehicle speed sensor signal (output shaft revolution signal) from TCM, received by the ICC sensor integrated unit via CAN commu-nication, are inconsistent

• Wheel speed sensor• ABS actuator and electric unit (control

unit)• Vehicle speed sensor A/T (output speed

sensor)• TCM• ICC sensor integrated unit


[ICC]C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View". NO >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

1. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 2. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to

TM-258, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to

BRC-88, "DTC No. Index". NO >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".

Diagnosis Procedure (M/T Models) INFOID:0000000004638226


Check if “C1A04” or “U1000” is detected other than “C1A03” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to


2.CHECK DATA MONITOR

1. Start the engine.2. Drive the vehicle. 3. Check that the value of “SPEED METER” of “METER/M&A” is almost the same as the value of “VHCL

SPEED SE” of “ICC” with “DATA MONITOR”. CAUTION:Be careful of the vehicle speed. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View". NO >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

1. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 2. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “METER/M&A”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to

MWI-99, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 4.





DESCRIPTION


CS

C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Perform the action test after adjusting the laser beam aiming of ICC sensor integrated unit when the followingoperation is performed. • Removal and installation of ICC sensor integrated unit• Replacement of ICC sensor integrated unit




>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


[ICC]C1A04 ABS/TCS/VDC SYSTEM


C1A04 ABS/TCS/VDC SYSTEM


• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) transmits the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed), the stop lampswitch signal and VDC/TCS/ABS system operation condition to ICC sensor integrated unit via CAN commu-nication.

• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) receives the deceleration degree command value signal from theICC sensor integrated unit with CAN communication and controls the brake fluid pressure.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:If DTC “C1A04” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to CCS-99, "DTCLogic".



1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 2. Check if the “U1000” is detected other than “C1A04” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “U1000” detected?YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

Refer to CCS-99, "DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2.









>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM

DTC(On board dis-

play)



C1A04(4)

ABS/TCS/VDC CIRCIf a malfunction occurs in the VDC/TCS/ABS system



CS

C1A04 ABS/TCS/VDC SYSTEM[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >1. Erase the “Self Diagnostic Result”, and then perform “All DTC Reading” again after performing the action

test. (Refer to CCS-12, "ACTION TEST : Description" for action test.)2. Check that the ICC system is normal.

>> WORK END


[ICC]C1A05 BRAKE SW/STOP LAMP SW


C1A05 BRAKE SW/STOP LAMP SW


• ICC brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON when depressing the brake pedal.• ICC clutch switch is turned OFF when depressing the clutch pedal (M/T models).

NOTE:ICC clutch switch and ICC brake switch are connected in series.

• ICC brake switch signal is input to ECM. The signal is transmitted from ECM to ICC sensor integrated unitvia CAN communication.

• Stop lamp switch signal is input to ECM and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). These signals aretransmitted from ECM and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) to ICC sensor integrated unit via CANcommunication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:If DTC “C1A05” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, “U0401”, “U0415”, or “U0121”, first diagnose the DTC“U1000”, “U0401”, “U0415”, or “U0121”.• DTC “U1000”: Refer to CCS-99, "DTC Logic".• DTC “U0401”: Refer to CCS-93, "DTC Logic".• DTC “U0415”: Refer to CCS-97, "DTC Logic".• DTC “U0121”: Refer to CCS-91, "DTC Logic".

Diagnosis Procedure (A/T Models) INFOID:0000000004638234


1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III.2. Check if “U1000”, “U0401”, “U0415”, or “U0121” is detected other than “C1A05” in “Self Diagnostic Result”

of “ICC”.Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to


2.CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH WITH ICC DATA MONITOR

Check that “BRAKE SW” operate normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “ICC”.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.

DTC(On board dis-

play)



C1A05(5)

BRAKE SW/STOP L SW

If ICC sensor integrated unit receives signals in-dicating that the stop lamp switch [from ABS ac-tuator and electric unit (control unit)] is ON and the ICC brake switch (from ECM) is ON

• Stop lamp switch circuit• ICC brake switch circuit• ICC clutch switch circuit (M/T mod-

els)• Stop lamp switch• ICC brake switch• ICC clutch switch (M/T models)• Incorrect stop lamp switch installa-

tion• Incorrect ICC brake switch installa-

tion• Incorrect ICC clutch switch installa-

tion (M/T models)• ECM• ABS actuator and electric unit (con-

trol unit)


CS

C1A05 BRAKE SW/STOP LAMP SW[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >NO >> GO TO 4.

3.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH WITH ABS DATA MONITOR

Check that “STOP LAMP SW” operate normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “ABS”.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 13.NO >> GO TO 9.

4.CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH INSTALLATION

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check ICC brake switch for correct installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Adjust ICC brake switch installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".

5.CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH

1. Disconnect ICC brake switch connector.2. Check ICC brake switch. Refer to CCS-58, "Component Inspection (ICC Brake Switch)".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Replace ICC brake switch.

6.CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between ICC brake switch harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> Repair or replace ICC brake switch power supply circuit.

7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ICC BRAKE SWITCH AND ECM

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect ECM connector.3. Check for continuity between ICC brake switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Repair the harness or connectors.

8.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ECM

1. Connect all connectors again if the connectors are disconnected.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Perform “All DTC Reading”.4. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”. Refer to EC-564, "DTC Index".Is any DTC detected?YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts identified by the self-diagnosis result.NO >> Replace ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".

Terminal

Voltage(Approx.)

(+) (–)

ICC brake switch

GroundConnector Terminal

E114 1 Battery voltage

ICC brake switch ECMContinuity

Connector Terminal Connector Terminal

E114 2 M107 126 Existed




9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INSTALLATION

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check stop lamp switch for correct installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 10.NO >> Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".

10.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

1. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.2. Check stop lamp switch. Refer to CCS-58, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 11.NO >> Replace stop lamp switch.

11.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 12.NO >> Repair or replace stop lamp switch power supply circuit.

12.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT(CONTROL UNIT)

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control

unit) harness connector.



1. Connect all connectors again if the connectors are disconnected.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Perform “All DTC Reading”.4. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”. Refer to EC-564, "DTC Index".Is any DTC detected?YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts identified by the self-diagnosis result.NO >> GO TO 14.

14.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

1. Connect all connectors again if the connectors are disconnected.2. Turn ignition switch ON.

Terminal

Voltage(Approx.)

(+) (–)

Stop lamp switch



Stop lamp switchABS actuator and electric unit

(control unit) Continuity


E110 4 E41 30 Existed


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >3. Perform “All DTC Reading”.4. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. Refer to BRC-88, "DTC No. Index".Is any DTC detected?YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts identified by the self-diagnosis result.NO >> Replace ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".

Diagnosis Procedure (M/T Models) INFOID:0000000004638235


1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III.2. Check if “U1000”, “U0401”, “U0415”, or “U0121” is detected other than “C1A05” in “Self Diagnostic Result”

of “ICC”.Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to


2.CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH WITH ICC DATA MONITOR

Check that “BRAKE SW” operate normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “ICC”.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> GO TO 4.



4.CHECK ICC CLUTCH SWITCH INSTALLATION

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check ICC clutch switch for correct installation. Refer to CL-5, "Inspection and Adjustment".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Adjust ICC clutch switch installation. Refer to CL-5, "Inspection and Adjustment".

5.CHECK ICC CLUTCH SWITCH

1. Disconnect ICC clutch switch connector.2. Check ICC clutch switch. Refer to CCS-58, "Component Inspection (ICC Clutch Switch)".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Replace ICC clutch switch.

6.CHECK ICC CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between ICC clutch switch harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> Repair or replace ICC clutch switch power supply circuit.

Terminal

Voltage(Approx.)

(+) (–)

ICC clutch switch






7.CHECK ICC BRAKE SWITCH INSTALLATION

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check ICC brake switch for correct installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Adjust ICC brake switch installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect ICC brake switch connector.3. Check ICC brake switch. Refer to CCS-58, "Component Inspection (ICC Brake Switch)".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 9.NO >> Replace ICC brake switch.

9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ICC CLUTCH SWITCH AND ICC BRAKE SWITCH

1. Check continuity between ICC brake switch harness connector and ICC clutch switch harness connector.

2. Check continuity between ICC clutch switch harness connector and ground.


10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ICC BRAKE SWITCH AND ECM

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect ECM connector.3. Check for continuity between ICC brake switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.





1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

ICC clutch switch ICC brake switchContinuity



ICC clutch switch

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

E113 2 Not existed

ICC brake switch ECMContinuity


E114 2 M107 126 Existed


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >2. Check stop lamp switch for correct installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 13.NO >> Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".







1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control

unit) harness connector.





1. Connect all connectors again if the connectors are disconnected.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Perform “All DTC Reading”.4. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. Refer to BRC-88, "DTC No. Index".Is any DTC detected?

Terminal

Voltage(Approx.)

(+) (–)

Stop lamp switch



Stop lamp switchABS actuator and electric unit

(control unit) Continuity





< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts identified by the self-diagnosis result.NO >> Replace ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".

Component Inspection (ICC Brake Switch) INFOID:0000000004638236


Check for continuity between ICC brake switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace ICC brake switch.

Component Inspection (ICC Clutch Switch) INFOID:0000000004638237

1.CHECK ICC CLUTCH SWITCH

Check for continuity between ICC clutch switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace ICC clutch switch.

Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000004638238


Check for continuity between stop lamp switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace stop lamp switch.




Terminal Condition Continuity

1 2When brake pedal is depressed

Not exist-ed

When brake pedal is not depressed Existed


1 2When clutch pedal is depressed

Not exist-ed

When clutch pedal is not depressed Existed


1 2

When brake pedal is depressed Existed

When brake pedal is not depressedNot exist-

ed

3 4

When brake pedal is depressed Existed

When brake pedal is not depressedNot exist-

ed


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C




>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


[ICC]C1A06 OPERATION SW


C1A06 OPERATION SW


• Operate the ICC system ON/OFF and vehicle speed/vehicle distance setting by the ICC steering switch. • The ICC steering switch signal is input to the ECM. It is transmitted from ECM to ICC sensor integrated unit

via CAN communication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC




1. Start the engine.2. Wait for approximately 5 minutes after turning the MAIN switch of ICC system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 4. Check if the “C1A06” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A06” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-60, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".



Check if “U1000” is detected other than “C1A06” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “U1000” detected?YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


2.CHECK ICC STEERING SWITCH

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the ICC steering switch connector. 3. Check the ICC steering switch. Refer to CCS-61, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Replace the ICC steering switch.

3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SPIRAL CABLE AND ECM

1. Disconnect the ECM connector. 2. Check for continuity between the spiral cable harness connector and ECM harness connector.

DTC(On board dis-

play)



C1A06(6)

OPERATION SW CIRC

If the input signal from ICC steering switch is malfunctioning

• ICC steering switch circuit• ICC steering switch• ECM


CS

C1A06 OPERATION SW[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


3. Check for continuity between spiral cable harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.

4.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE

Check for continuity between spiral cable terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace the spiral cable.


1. Connect the connectors of ICC steering switch and ECM connector. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON.3. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 4. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform self-diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer

to EC-564, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004638243


Check resistance between ICC steering switch terminals.

Spiral cable ECMContinuity


M3625

M107101

Existed32 108

Spiral cable

Ground

ContinuityConnector Terminal

M3625

Not existed32

Spiral cableContinuity

Terminal

13 25Existed

16 32

Terminal Switch operationResistance

[Ω]

13 16

When pressing MAIN switch Approx. 0

When pressing CANCEL switch Approx. 309

When pressing DISTANCE switch Approx. 741

When pressing SET/COAST switchApprox.

1406

When pressing RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

Approx. 2586

When all switches are not pressedApprox.

5456

JSOIA0069GB


[ICC]C1A06 OPERATION SW

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace the ICC steering switch.






>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


CS

C1A12 LASER BEAM OFF CENTER[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


C1A12 LASER BEAM OFF CENTER


ICC sensor integrated unit detects the reflected light from the vehicle ahead by irradiating a laser forward. Itcalculates the distance from and relative speed with the vehicle ahead based on the detected signal.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.ADJUST LASER BEAM AIMING

1. Adjust the laser beam aiming with CONSULT-III. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT: Description".

2. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 3. Check if the “C1A12” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A12” detected?YES >> Replace ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View". NO >> INSPECTION END






>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END

DTC(On board dis-


C1A12(12)

LASER BEAM OFFCNTRLaser beam of ICC sensor integrated unit is off the aiming point

Laser beam is off the aiming point


[ICC]C1A13 STOP LAMP RELAY


C1A13 STOP LAMP RELAY


The ICC brake hold relay activates the stop lamp by the ICC brake hold relay drive signal (stop lamp drive sig-nal) outputted by the ICC sensor integrated unit.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (1)

1. Start the engine.2. Perform the active test item “STOP LAMP” with CONSULT-III. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 4. Check if the “C1A13” is detected as the current malfunction in the “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A13” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (2)

1. Drive at the vehicle speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for approximately 20 seconds or more without thebrake pedal depressed. CAUTION:Always drive safely. NOTE:If it is outside the above condition, repeat step 1.

2. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 3. Check if the “C1A13” is detected as the current malfunction in the “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A13” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".



Check if “U1000” is detected other than “C1A13” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”.Is “U1000” detected?

DTC(On board dis-


C1A13(13)

STOP LAMP RLY FIX

• If the stop lamp is not activated even though the ICC sensor integrated unit is transmitting a ICC brake hold relay drive signal

• If the stop lamp is activated even though the ICC sensor integrated unit is not trans-mitting a ICC brake hold relay drive signal

• Stop lamp switch circuit• ICC brake switch circuit• ICC brake hold relay circuit• Stop lamp switch• ICC brake switch• ICC brake hold relay• Incorrect stop lamp switch installation• Incorrect ICC brake switch installation• ECM• ABS actuator and electric unit (control

unit)


CS

C1A13 STOP LAMP RELAY[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

Refer to CCS-99, "DTC Logic".NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH WITH ICC DATA MONITOR

Check that “STOP LAMP SW” operate normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “ICC”.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 10.NO >> GO TO 3.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check stop lamp switch for correct installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".



5.CHECK STOP LAMP ILLUMINATION

1. Connect stop lamp switch connector.2. Remove ICC brake hold relay.3. Check that the stop lamp is illuminated by depressing the brake pedal to turn the stop lamp ON.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.

6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND ECM

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector and ECM connector.3. Check for continuity between the stop lamp switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.


7.CHECK ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY CIRCUIT

1. Connect ICC brake hold relay and ECM connector.2. Check that the stop lamp does not illuminate when brake pedal is not depressed.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 9.NO >> GO TO 8.

8.CHECK ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY

1. Remove ICC brake hold relay.2. Check ICC brake hold relay. Refer to CCS-69, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 9.

Stop lamp switch ECMContinuity


E110 2 M107 122 Existed



< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >NO >> Replace ICC brake hold relay.



10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT AND ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect ICC sensor integrated unit connector and ICC brake hold relay.3. Check for continuity between ICC sensor integrated unit harness connector and ICC brake hold relay har-

ness connector.

4. Check for continuity between ICC sensor integrated unit harness connector and ground.


11.CHECK ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT

Check for continuity between ICC brake hold relay harness connector and ground.


12.CHECK ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT STANDARD VOLTAGE

1. Connect ICC sensor integrated unit connector.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Perform “STOP LAMP” on “Active Test” of “ICC”, and then check the voltage between ICC brake hold

relay harness connector and ground.

ICC sensor integrated unit ICC brake hold relayContinuity


E67 2 E51 2 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

E67 2 Not existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

E51 1 Existed

TerminalCondition

Voltage(Approx.)

(+) (–)


Ground

Active Test item

“STOP LAMP”Connector Terminal

E51 2

Off 0 V

OnBattery voltage


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 13.NO >> Replace ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".

13.CHECK ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check voltage between ICC brake hold relay harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 14.NO >> Repair or replace ICC brake hold relay power supply circuit.

14.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY AND ECM

1. Disconnect ECM, rear combination lamp and high-mounted stop lamp connector.2. Check continuity between ICC brake hold relay harness connector and ECM harness connector.

3. Check continuity between ICC brake hold relay harness connector and ground.



1. Connect ECM, rear combination lamp and high-mounted stop lamp connector and ICC brake hold relay.2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Perform “STOP LAMP” on “Active Test” of “ICC”, and then check the stop lamp for illumination.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 16.NO >> Replace ICC brake hold relay.




1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check stop lamp switch for correct installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 18.

Terminals

Voltage(Approx.)

(+) (–)




ICC brake hold relay ECMContinuity


E51 5 M107 122 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

E51 5 Not existed



< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >NO >> Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".







1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.3. Check for continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector and ABS actuator and electric unit

(control unit) harness connector.





1. Connect all connectors again if the connectors are disconnected.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Perform “All DTC Reading”.4. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. Refer to BRC-88, "DTC No. Index".Is any DTC detected?YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts identified by the self-diagnosis result.NO >> Replace ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".

Terminals

Voltage(Approx.)

(+) (–)

Stop lamp switch



Stop lamp switchABS actuator and electric

unit (control unit) Continuity




CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C




Apply battery voltage to ICC brake hold relay terminals 1 and 2, andthen check for continuity under the following conditions.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace ICC brake hold relay.






>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


3 5

When the battery voltage is applied Existed

When the battery voltage is not ap-plied

Not exist-ed

JSOIA0075GB


[ICC]C1A14 ECM


C1A14 ECM


• ECM transmits the accelerator pedal position signal, ICC brake switch signal, stop lamp switch signal, ICCsteering switch signal, etc. to ICC sensor integrated unit via CAN communication.

• ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator based on the engine torque demand received from the ICCsensor integrated unit via CAN communication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1. Start the engine.2. Operate the ICC system and drive.


3. Stop the vehicle.4. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 5. Check if the “C1A14” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A14” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-70, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".






Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to

EC-564, "DTC Index".NO >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".



DTC(On board dis-


C1A14(14)

ECM CIRCUIT If ECM is malfunctioning• Accelerator pedal position sensor• ECM• ICC sensor integrated unit


CS

C1A14 ECM[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C





>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


[ICC]C1A15 GEAR POSITION


C1A15 GEAR POSITION


ICC sensor integrated unit judges the gear position based on the following signals. • Current gear position signal transmitted from TCM via CAN communication. • Value of gear ratio calculated from input speed signal transmitted from TCM via CAN communication.• Value of gear ratio calculated from the vehicle speed signal transmitted from ABS actuator and electric unit

(control unit) via CAN communication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:If DTC “C1A15” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, “C1A03” or “C1A04”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”,“C1A03” or “C1A04”. • Refer to CCS-99, "DTC Logic" for DTC “U1000”.• Refer to CCS-47, "DTC Logic" for DTC “C1A03”.• Refer to CCS-50, "DTC Logic" for DTC “C1A04”.



1. Start the engine.2. Turn the MAIN switch of ICC system ON. 3. Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (6 MPH) or faster for approximately 15 minutes or more.


4. Stop the vehicle.5. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 6. Check if “C1A15” is detected as the current malfunction in the “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A15” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-72, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".



Check if “C1A03”, “C1A04” or “U1000” is detected other than “C1A15” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to


2.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL

Check that “VHCL SPEED SE” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “ICC”. CAUTION:Be careful of the vehicle speed. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> GO TO 7.

DTC(On board dis-

play)



C1A15(15)

GEAR POSITION

If a mismatch occurs between a current gear position signal transmitted from TCM via CAN communication and the gear position calculated by ICC sensor integrated unit

• Input speed sensor• Vehicle speed sensor A/T (output speed

sensor)• TCM


CS

C1A15 GEAR POSITION[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


3.CHECK GEAR POSITION

Check that “GEAR” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “ICC”. CAUTION:Be careful of the vehicle speed. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK GEAR POSITION SIGNAL

Check that “GEAR” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “TRANSMISSION”. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> GO TO 6.

5.CHECK INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL

Check that “INPUT SPEED” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “TRANSMISSION”. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View". NO >> GO TO 6.



TM-258, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".


1. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 2. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to







>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM




[ICC]C1A15 GEAR POSITION


>> WORK END


CS

C1A16 RADAR STAIN[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


C1A16 RADAR STAIN


ICC sensor integrated unit detects the reflected light from the vehicle ahead by irradiating a laser beam for-ward. It calculates the distance from and relative speed with the vehicle ahead based on the detected signal.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:DTC “C1A16” may be detected under the following conditions. (Explain to the customer about the differencebetween the contamination detection function and the indication when the malfunction is detected and tellthem “This is not malfunction”.)• When contamination or foreign materials adhere to the ICC sensor integrated unit body window• When driving while it is snowing or when frost forms on the ICC sensor integrated unit body window• When ICC sensor integrated unit body window is temporarily fogged


1.VISUAL CHECK 1

Check ICC sensor integrated unit body window for contamination and foreign materials. Does contamination or foreign materials adhere?YES >> Wipe out the contamination and foreign materials from the ICC sensor integrated unit body win-

dow. NO >> GO TO 2.

2.VISUAL CHECK 2

Check ICC sensor integrated unit body window for cracks and scratches. Is it found?YES >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View". NO >> GO TO 3.

3.INTERVIEW

1. Ask if there is any trace of contamination or foreign materials adhering to the ICC sensor integrated unitbody window.

2. Ask if ICC sensor integrated unit body window was frosted during driving or if vehicle was driven in snow. 3. Ask if ICC sensor integrated unit body window was temporarily fogged. (Front window glass may also

tend to fog, etc.)What is the result of the interview with the customer?YES >> Explain to the customer about the difference between the contamination detection function and

the indication when the malfunction is detected and tell them “This is not malfunction”.NO >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".



DTC(On board dis-

play)



C1A16(16)

RADAR STAINIf any stain occurs to ICC sensor integrated unit body window

• Stain or foreign materials is deposit-ed

• Cracks or scratches exist


[ICC]C1A16 RADAR STAIN





>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


CS

C1A18 LASER AIMING INCMP[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


C1A18 LASER AIMING INCMP


Always perform the laser beam aiming adjustment after replacing the ICC sensor integrated unit.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1. Start the engine.2. Turn the MAIN switch of ICC system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 4. Check if the “C1A18” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A18” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-77, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> INSPECTION END



1. Adjust the laser beam aiming. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description". 2. Erase All self-diagnosis results with CONSULT-III.3. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 4. Check if the “C1A18” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A18” detected?YES >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View". NO >> INSPECTION END






>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM

DTC(On board dis-

play)



C1A18(18)

LASER AIMING IN-CMP

Laser beam aiming of ICC sensor integrated unit is not adjusted

• No laser beam aiming adjustment is performed

• Laser beam aiming adjustment has been interrupted


[ICC]C1A18 LASER AIMING INCMP



>> WORK END


CS

C1A21 UNIT HIGH TEMP[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


C1A21 UNIT HIGH TEMP


ICC sensor integrated unit integrates the temperature sensor.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Wait for 10 minutes or more to cool the ICC sensor integrated unit. 3. Start the engine.4. Turn the MAIN switch of ICC system ON. 5. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 6. Check if the “C1A21” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A21” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-79, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".


1.CHECK ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Check for any malfunctions in engine cooling system. Is engine cooling system normal?YES >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair engine cooling system.






>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



DTC(On board dis-

play)



C1A21(21)

UNIT HIGH TEMPIf the temperature sensor (integrated in the ICC sensor integrated unit) detects a high temperature

Temperature around ICC sensor inte-grated unit is excessively high


[ICC]C1A21 UNIT HIGH TEMP

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >>> WORK END


CS

C1A24 NP RANGE[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


C1A24 NP RANGE


ICC sensor integrated unit judges the NP position status from the shift position signal and current gear positionsignal received from TCM via CAN communication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1.CHECK DTC REPRODUCE (1)

1. Start the engine.2. Turn the MAIN switch of ICC system ON. 3. Wait for approximately 5 minutes or more after shifting the selector lever to “P” position. 4. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 5. Check if the “C1A24” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A24” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-81, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC REPRODUCE (2)

1. Wait for approximately 5 minutes or more after shifting the selector lever to “N” position. 2. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 3. Check if the “C1A24” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A24” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-81, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".





2.CHECK NP POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL

Check that “NP RANGE SW” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “ICC”. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".

3.CHECK TCM DATA MONITOR

Check that “SLCT LVR POSI” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “TRANSMISSION”.

DTC(On board dis-


C1A24(24)

NP RANGEIf the shift position signal and the current gear position signal, transmitted from TCM via CAN communication, are inconsistent

• TCM• Transmission range switch


[ICC]C1A24 NP RANGE

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View". NO >> GO TO 4.

4.PERFORM TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS








>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


CS

C1A26 ECD MODE MALFUNCTION[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


C1A26 ECD MODE MALFUNCTION


ECD (ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED DECELERATION)• Receives deceleration degree commandment value signal from ICC sensor integrated unit, and controls

brake fluid pressure with the motor [built in ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)].• ECD control-related signals are transmitted by ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) to ICC sensor

integrated unit via CAN communication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:If DTC “C1A26” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, “U0415”, or “U0121”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”,“U0415”, or “U0121”.• DTC “U1000”: Refer to CCS-99, "DTC Logic".• DTC “U0415”: Refer to CCS-97, "DTC Logic".• DTC “U0121”: Refer to CCS-91, "DTC Logic".



1. Start the engine.2. Wait for approximately 1 minute after turning the MAIN switch of ICC system ON.3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 4. Check if the “C1A26” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A26” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-83, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".



Check if “U1000”, “U0415”, or “U0121” is detected other than “C1A26” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”.Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to



Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to

BRC-88, "DTC No. Index".NO >> Replace ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".


DESCRIPTION

DTC No.(On board display)

Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause

C1A26(26)

ECD MODE MALF If an abnormal condition occurs with ECD systemABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)


[ICC]C1A26 ECD MODE MALFUNCTION

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Perform the action test after adjusting the laser beam aiming of ICC sensor integrated unit when the followingoperation is performed. • Removal and installation of ICC sensor integrated unit• Replacement of ICC sensor integrated unit




>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


CS

C1A27 ECD POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


C1A27 ECD POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


ECD (ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED DECELERATION)• Receives deceleration degree commandment value signal from ICC sensor integrated unit, and controls

brake fluid pressure with the motor [built in ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)].• ECD control-related signals are transmitted by ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) to ICC sensor

integrated unit via CAN communication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:If DTC “C1A27” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, “U0415”, or “U0121” first diagnose the DTC “U1000”,“U0415”, or “U0121”.• DTC “U1000”: Refer to CCS-99, "DTC Logic".• DTC “U0415”: Refer to CCS-97, "DTC Logic".• DTC “U0121”: Refer to CCS-91, "DTC Logic".



1. Start the engine.2. Wait for approximately 1 minute after turning the MAIN switch of ICC system ON.3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 4. Check if the “C1A27” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A27” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-85, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".



Check if “U1000”, “U0415” or “U0121” is detected other than “C1A27” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”.Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to


2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT OF ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

Check power supply circuit of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-37, "Diagnosis Proce-dure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Perform self-diagnosis of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-88, "DTC No.

Index".NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.

DTC No.(On board display)

Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause

C1A27(27)

ECD PWR SUPLY CIRECD system power supply voltage is excessively low

• ABS actuator and electric unit (con-trol unit) power supply circuit

• ABS actuator and electric unit (con-trol unit)


[ICC]C1A27 ECD POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT







>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


CS

C1A33 CAN TRANSMISSION ERROR[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


C1A33 CAN TRANSMISSION ERROR


ICC sensor integrated unit transmits the signal required by the ICC system control to ECM via CAN communi-cation.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC




1. Start the engine.2. Turn the MAIN switch of ICC system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 4. Check if the “C1A33” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A33” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-87, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".




Refer to CCS-99, "DTC Logic". NO >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".






>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM

DTC(On board dis-


C1A33(33)

CAN TRANSMISSION ERROR

If an error occurs in the CAN communication signal that ICC sensor integrated unit trans-mits to ECM



[ICC]C1A33 CAN TRANSMISSION ERROR



>> WORK END


CS

C1A34 COMMAND ERROR[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


C1A34 COMMAND ERROR


ICC sensor integrated unit transmits the command signal required for the ECM control via CAN communica-tion.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC




1. Start the engine.2. Operate the ICC system and drive.


3. Stop the vehicle.4. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 5. Check if the “C1A34” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “C1A34” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-89, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".




Refer to CCS-99, "DTC Logic". NO >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".






DTC(On board dis-


C1A34(34)

COMMAND ERRORIf an error occurs in the command signal that ICC sensor integrated unit transmits to ECM via CAN communication



[ICC]C1A34 COMMAND ERROR

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


CS

U0121 VDC CAN 2[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


U0121 VDC CAN 2


ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) transmit the VDC system signal to ICC sensor integrated unit viaCAN communication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:If DTC “U0121” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to CCS-99, "DTCLogic".



1. Start the engine.2. Turn the MAIN switch of ICC system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 4. Check if the “U0121” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “U0121” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to CCS-91, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".



Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0121” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “U1000” detected?YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.








DTC(On board dis-


U0121(127)

VDC CAN CIR2

If ICC sensor integrated unit detects an error signal that is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communica-tion



[ICC]U0121 VDC CAN 2




>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


CS

U0401 ECM CAN 1[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


U0401 ECM CAN 1


ECM transmits the signal related to engine control (ICC system) to ICC sensor integrated unit via CAN com-munication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC







Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0401” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of ”ICC”. Is “U1000” detected?YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


2.CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to

EC-564, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".






Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible causes

U0401(120)

ECM CAN CIR1If ICC sensor integrated unit detects an error signal that is received from ECM via CAN communication

ECM


[ICC]U0401 ECM CAN 1

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Adjust the laser beam aiming of the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMINGADJUSTMENT : Description".

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


CS

U0402 TCM CAN 1[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


U0402 TCM CAN 1


TCM transmits the signal related to A/T control to ICC sensor integrated unit via CAN communication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC










Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”. Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to






DTC(On board dis-

play)



U0402(122)

TCM CAN CIRC1If ICC sensor integrated unit detects an error signal that is received from TCM via CAN communication

TCM


[ICC]U0402 TCM CAN 1

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Adjust the laser beam aiming of the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMINGADJUSTMENT : Description".

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


CS

U0415 VDC CAN 1[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


U0415 VDC CAN 1


ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) transmits the signal related to the VDC system to ICC sensor inte-grated unit via CAN communication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC















DTC(On board dis-


U0415(126)

VDC CAN CIR1

If ICC sensor integrated unit detects an error signal that is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communica-tion



[ICC]U0415 VDC CAN 1




>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


CS

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT


CAN COMMUNICATIONCAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle mul-tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modernvehicle is equipped with many electronic control units, and each control unit shares information and links withother control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connectedwith 2 communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads the required data only.CAN communication signal chart. Refer to LAN-27, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".


DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:If “U1000” is detected, first diagnose the CAN communication system.


1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. Turn the MAIN switch of ICC system ON, and then wait for 2 seconds or more. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 4. Check if the “U1000” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “U1000” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Refer to LAN-18, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".






>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM




Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible causes

U1000(100)

CAN COMM CIRCUITIf ICC sensor integrated unit is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 sec-onds or more

CAN communication system


[ICC]U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT


>> WORK END


CS

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)


CAN controller controls the communication of CAN communication signal and the error detection.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1. Turn the MAIN switch of ICC system ON. 2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 3. Check if the “U1010” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “U1010” detected as the current malfunction?YES >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".NO >> INSPECTION END






>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> WORK END


Trouble diagnosis name DTC Detecting Condition Possible causes

U1010(110)

CONTROL UNIT (CAN)If ICC sensor integrated unit detects malfunc-tion by CAN controller initial diagnosis



[ICC]POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


1.CHECK FUSES

Check if any of the following fuses are blown:

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.

2.CHECK ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the ICC sensor integrated unit connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between ICC sensor integrated unit harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the ICC sensor integrated unit power supply circuit.

3.CHECK ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Check for continuity between ICC sensor integrated unit harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair the ICC sensor integrated unit ground circuit.

Signal name Fuse No.

Ignition power supply 45

Terminal

Voltage(Approx.)

(+) (–)





GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

E67 4 Existed


CS

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT


Park/neutral position switch signals is input to ECM. The signals are transmitted from ECM to ICC sensor inte-grated unit via CAN communication. ICC sensor integrated unit performs the following controls via park/neutral position switch. • Rejects any attempt to set ICC system when shift knob is set at neutral position.• Cancels ICC system when shift knob is shifted to neutral position.

Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004638320

1.CHECK OPERATION OF PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Check that “NP SW SIG” operate normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “ICC” with CONSULT-III.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> The park/neutral position switch circuit is normal.NO >> Refer to CCS-103, "Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK FUSES

Check if any of the following fuses are blown:

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.

2.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between park/neutral position switch harness connector and ground.


3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH AND ECM

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the ECM connector.3. Check for continuity between the park/neutral position switch harness connector and ECM harness con-

nector.

“NP SW SIG”Shift knob at neutral : OnShift knob at a position other than neutral

: Off

Signal name Fuse No.

Ignition power supply 43

Terminal

Voltage(Approx.)

(+) (–)

Park/neutral position switch


F55 2 Battery voltage


[ICC]PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT



4.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Check the park/neutral position switch. Refer to CCS-104, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace the park/neutral position switch.


1. Connect connectors of park/neutral position switch and ECM.2. Perform “All DTC Reading”.3. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”.Is any DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to

EC-564, "DTC Index".NO >> Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".


1.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Check for continuity between the park/neutral position switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace park/neutral position switch.

Park/neutral position switch ECMContinuity


F55 1 M107 109 Existed

terminals Condition Continuity

1 2When shift knob is neutral position Existed

When shift knob is except neutral position Not existed


CS

ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATIONICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT

Reference Value INFOID:0000000004638323

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

Monitor item Condition Value/Status

MAIN SW Ignition switch ONWhen MAIN switch is pressed On

When MAIN switch is not pressed Off

SET/COAST SW Ignition switch ONWhen SET/COAST switch is pressed On

When SET/COAST switch is not pressed Off

CANCEL SW Ignition switch ONWhen CANCEL switch is pressed On

When CANCEL switch is not pressed Off

RESUME/ACC SW Ignition switch ONWhen RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed On

When RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is not pressed Off

DISTANCE SW Ignition switch ONWhen DISTANCE switch is pressed On

When DISTANCE switch is not pressed Off

CRUISE OPEDrive the vehicle and operate the ICC system.

When ICC system is controlling On

When ICC system is not controlling Off

BRAKE SW Ignition switch ON

• When brake pedal is depressed• When clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models)

Off

When brake pedal and clutch pedal (M/T models) are not depressed

On

STOP LAMP SW Ignition switch ONWhen brake pedal is depressed On

When brake pedal is not depressed Off

IDLE SW Engine runningIdling On

Except idling (depress accelerator pedal) Off

SET DISTANCE

• Start the engine and turn the ICC system ON.

• Press the DISTANCE switch to change the vehi-cle-to-vehicle distance set-ting.

When set to “long” Long

When set to “middle” Mid

When set to “short” Short

CRUISE LAMPStart the engine and press MAIN switch.

ICC system ON(MAIN switch indicator ON)

On

ICC system OFF(MAIN switch indicator OFF)

Off

OWN VHCLStart the engine and press MAIN switch.

ICC system ON(Own vehicle indicator ON)

On

ICC system OFF(Own vehicle indicator OFF)

Off

VHCL AHEADDrive the vehicle and activate the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.

When a vehicle ahead is detected (vehicle ahead de-tection indicator ON)

On

When a vehicle ahead is not detected (vehicle ahead detection indicator OFF)

Off

ICC WARNINGStart the engine and press the MAIN switch.

When ICC system is malfunctioning (ICC system warning lamp ON)

On

When ICC system is normal (ICC system warning lamp OFF)

Off


[ICC]ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT


VHCL SPEED SE While drivingValue of vehicle

speed signal (wheel speed)

SET VHCL SPD While driving When vehicle speed is setDisplays the set vehicle speed.

BUZZER O/P Engine runningWhen the buzzer output signal is output On

When the buzzer output signal is not output Off

THRTL SENSORNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored

0.0

ENGINE RPM Engine runningEquivalent to ta-chometer read-

ing

WIPER SW Ignition switch ON

Wiper not operating Off

Wiper LO operation Low

Wiper HI operation High

YAW RATENOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored

0.0

STP LMP DRIVEDrive the vehicle and activate the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.

When ICC brake hold relay is activated On

When the ICC brake hold relay is not activated Off

D RANGE SW Engine running

When the selector lever is in “D”, “DS” position or man-ual mode (A/T models)

On

When the selector lever is in any position other than “D”, “DS” or manual mode (A/T models)

Off

NP RANGE SW Engine running

When the selector lever is in “N”, “P” position (A/T mod-els)

On

When the selector lever is in any position other than “N”, “P” (A/T models)

Off

PKB SWNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored

Off

PWR SUP MONI Engine running

Power supply voltage value of ICC sensor inte-

grated unit

VHCL SPD AT While drivingValue of A/T ve-hicle speed sen-

sor signal

THRTL OPENING Engine running Depress accelerator pedalDisplays the

throttle position.

GEAR While drivingDisplays the shift position.

CLUTCH SW SIG Ignition switch ON

• When clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models)• When brake pedal is depressed (M/T models)

On

When clutch pedal and brake pedal are not depressed (M/T models)

Off

NP SW SIG Ignition switch ON

When neutral position is selected (M/T models) On

When any position other than neutral is selected (M/T models)

Off

MODE SIGStart the engine and press MAIN switch

When ICC system is deactivated Off

When vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is acti-vated

ICC

When conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is activated

ASCD



CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

SET DISP IND

• Start the engine and acti-vate the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

• Press SET/COAST switch

SET switch indicator ON On

SET switch indicator OFF Off

DISTANCEDrive the vehicle and activate the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.

When a vehicle ahead is detected

Displays the dis-tance from the preceding vehi-

cle.

When a vehicle ahead is not detected 0.0

RELATIVE SPDDrive the vehicle and activate the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.

When a vehicle ahead is detectedDisplays the rel-

ative speed.

When a vehicle ahead is not detected 0.0


JPOIA0105ZZ

Terminal No.(Wire color)

Description

ConditionValue

(Approx.)+ – Signal name

Input/Output

1(R)

Ground

Ignition power supply Input Ignition switch ON Battery voltage

2(V)

ICC brake hold relay drive signal

OutputIgnition switch ON

— 0 V

At “STOP LAMP” test of “Active test”

12 V

3(L)

CAN-HInput/Output

— —

4(B)

Ground — Ignition switch ON 0 V

6(P)

CAN-L Input/Output

— —




Wiring Diagram - INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL - INFOID:0000000004638324

JCOWM0106GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


JCOWM0107GB




JCOWM0108GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


JCOWM0109GB




Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000004638325

If a malfunction occurs in the system, a chime sounds a beep, and ICC sensor integrated unit cancels the con-trol. Then the ICC system warning lamp in the combination meter illuminates.

JCOWM0110GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000004638326

If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec-tion priority chart.

DTC Index INFOID:0000000004638327

NOTE:• The details of time display are as per the following.- 0: The malfunctions that are detected now

CAN communication system (U1000, U1010)- 1 - 39: It increases like 0 → 1 → 2 ··· 38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever the ignition

switch OFF → ON. It returns to 0 when a malfunction is detected again in the process.- If it is over 39, it is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased.

Other than CAN communication system (Other than U1000, U1010)- 1 - 49: It increases like 0 → 1 → 2 ··· 38 → 49 after returning to the normal condition whenever the ignition

switch OFF → ON. It returns to 0 when a malfunction is detected again in the process.- If it is over 49, it is fixed to 49 until the self-diagnosis results are erased.

×: Applicable

Priority Detected items (DTC)

1• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)

2

• C1A01: POWER SUPPLY CIR• C1A02: POWER SUPPLY CIR 2• C1A04: ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC• C1A05: BRAKE SW/STOP L SW• C1A06: OPERATION SW CIRC• C1A12: LASER BEAM OFFCNTR• C1A13: STOP LAMP RLY FIX• C1A14: ECM CIRCUIT• C1A16: RADAR STAIN• C1A18: LASER AIMING INCMP• C1A21: UNIT HIGH TEMP• C1A24: NP RANGE• C1A26: ECD MODE MALF• C1A27: ECD PWR SUPLY CIR• C1A33: CAN TRANSMISSION ERROR• C1A34: COMMAND ERROR• U0121: VDC CAN CIR2• U0401: ECM CAN CIR1• U0402: TCM CAN CIR1• U0415: VDC CAN CIR1

3 • C1A03: VHCL SPEED SE CIRC

4 • C1A15: GEAR POSITION

5 • C1A00: CONTROL UNIT

DTC

CONSULT-III display

ICC sys-tem

warning lamp

Fail-safe function

ReferenceCONSULT-III

On board display

Vehicle-to-ve-hicle distance control mode


speed) cruise con-trol mode

Brake Assist (with

Preview Func-tion)

C1A00 0 CONTROL UNIT × × × × CCS-43

C1A01 1 POWER SUPPLY CIR × × × × CCS-45

C1A02 2 POWER SUPPLY CIR 2 × × × × CCS-45

C1A03 3 VHCL SPEED SE CIRC × × × × CCS-47

C1A04 4 ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC × × × × CCS-50

C1A05 5 BRAKE SW/STOP L SW × × × × CCS-52




C1A06 6 OPERATION SW CIRC × × × CCS-60

C1A12 12 LASER BEAM OFFCNTR × × × CCS-63

C1A13 13 STOP LAMP RLY FIX × × × CCS-64

C1A14 14 ECM CIRCUIT × × × × CCS-70

C1A15 15 GEAR POSITION × × × CCS-72

C1A16 16 RADAR STAIN × × × CCS-75

C1A18 18 LASER AIMING INCMP × × × CCS-77

C1A21 21 UNIT HIGH TEMP × × × × CCS-79

C1A24 24 NP RANGE × × × × CCS-81

C1A26 26 ECD MODE MALF × × × × CCS-83

C1A27 27 ECD PWR SUPLY CIR × × × × CCS-85

C1A33 33 CAN TRANSMISSION ERROR × × × × CCS-87

C1A34 34 COMMAND ERROR × × × × CCS-89

NO DTC IS DETECTED.FURTHER TESTING

MAY BE RE-QUIRED

55NO DTC IS DETECTED.

FURTHER TESTINGMAY BE REQUIRED.

— — — — —

U0121 127 VDC CAN CIR2 × × × × CCS-91

U0401 120 ECM CAN CIR1 × × × × CCS-93

U0402 122 TCM CAN CIR1 × × × × CCS-95

U0415 126 VDC CAN CIR1 × × × × CCS-97

U1000 100 CAN COMM CIRCUIT × × × × CCS-99

U1010 110 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) × × × × CCS-101

DTC

CONSULT-III display

ICC sys-tem

warning lamp

Fail-safe function

ReferenceCONSULT-III

On board display

Vehicle-to-ve-hicle distance control mode


speed) cruise con-trol mode

Brake Assist (with

Preview Func-tion)


CS

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISINTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS

Symptom Table INFOID:0000000004638328

Symptoms Reference page

Operation

MAIN switch does not turn ON. Refer to CCS-116, "Description".

MAIN switch does not turn OFF.

ICC system cannot be set (MAIN switch turns ON/OFF)

Refer to CCS-117, "Description".

CANCEL switch does not function.


Resume does not function.

Set speed does not increase.

Set distance to a vehicle ahead cannot be changed.

ICC is not cancelled when the A/T selector lever is “N” position.


Display/ChimeICC system display not appear. Refer to MWI-35, "Diagnosis Description".

Chime does not sound. Refer to CCS-121, "Description".

Control Driving force is hunting. Refer to CCS-123, "Description".

Function to detect a vehicle ahead

System frequently cannot detect a vehicle ahead.Refer to CCS-124, "Description".

Distance to detect a vehicle ahead is short.

System misidentifies a vehicle even though there is no vehicle ahead.

• Adjust laser beam aiming: Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description".

• Perform ICC system action test. Refer to CCS-12, "AC-TION TEST : Description". System misidentifies a vehicle in the next lane.

System does not detect a vehicle at all. Refer to CCS-125, "Description".


[ICC]MAIN SWITCH DOES NOT TURN ON, MAIN SWITCH DOES NOT TURN OFF


MAIN SWITCH DOES NOT TURN ON, MAIN SWITCH DOES NOT TURNOFF


MAIN switch does not turn ON• ICC system display does not appear even when MAIN switch is pressed.

MAIN switch does not turn OFF• When ICC system display is ON, display does not turn OFF even if MAIN switch is pressed. NOTE:When ICC system warning lamp illuminates, perform the self-diagnosis of ICC system, and then repair orreplace the malfunctioning parts.


1.MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION

1. Start the engine.2. Check that “MAIN SW” and “CRUISE LAMP” operate normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “ICC” with CON-

SULT-III. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> GO TO 4.

2.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.

Check that “CRUISE IND” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “METER/M&A”. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> GO TO 4.

3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.

1. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “METER/M&A”. 2. Check if DTC is detected. Refer to MWI-99, "DTC Index". Is any DTC detected?YES >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. NO >> GO TO 4.

4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS OF ICC SYSTEM

1. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 2. Check if the “U1000” is detected in self-diagnosis results of “ICC”. Is “U1000” detected?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> GO TO 6.

5.CAN COMMUNICATIONS INSPECTION

Check the CAN communication and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Refer to CCS-99, "DTC Logic".

>> INSPECTION END


Check the ICC steering switch. Refer to CCS-60, "Diagnosis Procedure".

>> INSPECTION END


CS

ICC SYSTEM CANNOT BE SET (MAIN SWITCH TURNS ON/OFF)[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


ICC SYSTEM CANNOT BE SET (MAIN SWITCH TURNS ON/OFF)


The MAIN switch can be turned ON/OFF, but the ICC system cannot be set even if the SET/COAST switch ispressed. NOTE:The system cannot be set in the following case. • When the vehicle ahead is not detected below the speed of 32 km/h (20 MPH).• When the selector lever is not in the “D”, “DS” position or manual mode. (A/T models)• When the shift knob is set at the neutral position. (M/T models)• When the front wipers are operating at LO or HI.• When the brake pedal is depressed. • When the clutch pedal is depressed. (M/T models)• When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight).• When the snow mode switch is turned ON.• When the VDC is turned OFF.• When ABS or VDC (including the TCS) operates.• When a wheel slips.


1.CHECK CAUSE OF AUTOMATIC CANCELLATION

Check if there is the cancellation cause in the “CAUSE OF AUTO-CANCEL” on “WORK SUPPORT” of “ICC”with CONSULT-III. Is it displayed?Not displayed>>GO TO 2.“OPE SW VOLT CIRC”>>Refer to CCS-60, "DTC Logic". “VHCL SPD UNMATCH”>>Refer to CCS-47, "DTC Logic". “IGN LOW VOLT”>>Refer to CCS-45, "DTC Logic". “ECM CIRCUIT”>>Refer to CCS-70, "DTC Logic". “CAN COMM ERROR”>>Refer to CCS-99, "DTC Logic".“ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC”>>Refer to CCS-50, "DTC Logic".“ECD CIRCUIT”>>Refer to CCS-83, "DTC Logic".


1. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 2. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Refer to CCS-113, "DTC Index".Is any DTC detected?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> GO TO 4.

3.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS

Repair or replace malfunctioning parts identified by the self-diagnosis result.

>> GO TO 6.

4.CHECK EACH SWITCH AND VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL

1. Start the engine.2. Check that the following items operate normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “ICC”. - “VHCL SPEED SE”- “D RANGE SW”- “SET/COAST SW”- “BRAKE SW”- “NP SW SIG”- “CLUTCH SW SIG”- “WIPER SW”Is there a malfunctioning item?All items are normal>>GO TO 5.


[ICC]ICC SYSTEM CANNOT BE SET (MAIN SWITCH TURNS ON/OFF)

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >“VHCL SPEED SE”>>Refer to CCS-47, "DTC Logic". “D RANGE SW”>>Refer to CCS-120, "Diagnosis Procedure".“SET/COAST SW”>>Refer to CCS-60, "DTC Logic". “BRAKE SW”>>Refer to CCS-52, "DTC Logic". “CLUTCH SW SIG”>>Refer to CCS-52, "DTC Logic". “NP SW SIG”>>Refer to CCS-104, "Component Inspection". “WIPER SW” (When the front wiper operation is normal)>>GO TO 5.“WIPER SW” (When the front wiper operation is malfunctioning)>>Performs the diagnosis of the front wiper.

Refer to WW-81, "Symptom Table".

5.REPLACE ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT

1. Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View". 2. Perform the laser beam aiming. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description".

>> GO TO 6.

6.CHECK ICC SYSTEM

1. Erase the self-diagnosis results, and then perform “All DTC Reading” again after performing the actiontest. (Refer to CCS-12, "ACTION TEST : Description" for action test.)


>> INSPECTION END


CS

ICC STEERING SWITCH (OTHER THAN MAIN SWITCH) DOES NOT FUNCTION[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


ICC STEERING SWITCH (OTHER THAN MAIN SWITCH) DOES NOTFUNCTION


MAIN switch can be turned ON/OFF, but the operation of RESUME/ACCELERATE switch, CANCEL switch,and DISTANCE switch cannot be performed during ICC system operation. NOTE:Resume is not accepted when the following condition is met. • When the MAIN switch is turned OFF once.


1.CHECK EACH SWITCH

1. Start the engine.2. Check that each switch operates normally on “DATA MONITOR” of “ICC” with CONSULT-III. - “RESUME/ACC SW”- “CANCEL SW”- “DISTANCE SW”Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM ALL OF THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS ITEMS

1. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 2. Check if the “U1000” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ICC”. Is “U1000” detected?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> GO TO 4.



>> INSPECTION END


Check the ICC steering switch. Refer to CCS-61, "Component Inspection".

>> GO TO 6.


1. Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".2. Adjust the laser beam aiming. Refer to CCS-113, "DTC Index".

>> GO TO 6.

6.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> INSPECTION END


[ICC]ICC SYSTEM DOES NOT CANCEL WHEN A/T SELECTOR LEVER SETS ON "N"


ICC SYSTEM DOES NOT CANCEL WHEN A/T SELECTOR LEVER SETSON "N"


The ICC system is not cancelled even when the A/T selector lever is shifted to the N position while the ICCsystem is active.


1.CHECK D RANGE SWITCH

Check if “D RANGE SW” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “ICC” with CONSULT-III. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM ALL SELF-DIAGNOSIS ITEMS

1. Perform “All DTC Reading”. 2. Check if the “U1000” is detected in “self-diagnosis results” of “ICC”. Is “U1000” detected?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> GO TO 4.



>> INSPECTION END

4.CHECK POSITION SWITCH

Check if “SLCT LVR POSI” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “TRANSMISSION”. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> GO TO 5.

5.PERFORM TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS

1. Perform the “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Refer to TM-258, "DTC Index".

>> GO TO 7.


1. Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".2. Perform the laser beam aiming. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description".

>> GO TO 7.

7.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> INSPECTION END


CS

CHIME DOES NOT SOUND[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


CHIME DOES NOT SOUND


Symptom check: In the following conditions, the warning chime may not sound even if the vehicle distance isshort. • When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.• When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing. • The warning chime will not sound when the accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.• The warning chime will not sound when own vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.• The warning chime does not sound when the system does not detect any vehicle ahead. (Diagnose the con-

ditions under which the system is detecting the vehicle ahead and when the system is malfunctioning. Ifthere is any malfunction in detecting the vehicle ahead, check the system following the CCS-124, "Descrip-tion".)


1.PERFORM ACTIVE TEST

Check if the warning chime sounds on the active test item “ICC BUZZER” of “ICC” with CONSULT-III. Does the warning chime sound?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> GO TO 3.

2.CHECK THE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM DURING WARNING CHIME OPERATION

1. Understand the vehicle ahead detecting condition when the malfunction occurred. If the warning chimeshould have sounded, replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".

2. Adjust the laser beam aiming. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description".

>> GO TO 8.


1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 2. Check if the “U1000” is detected in self-diagnosis results of “ICC”. Is “U1000” detected?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> GO TO 5.

4.CAN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM INSPECTION

Check the CAN communication system and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Refer to CCS-99, "DTCLogic".

>> INSPECTION END

5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.

1. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “METER/M&A”. 2. Check if DTC is detected. Refer to MWI-99, "DTC Index". Is any DTC detected?YES >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. NO >> GO TO 6.

6.CHECK COMBINATION METER CHIME OPERATION

Check meter buzzer. Refer to WCS-23, "Component Function Check"Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.


1. Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".


[ICC]CHIME DOES NOT SOUND

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >2. Adjust the laser beam aiming. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description".

>> GO TO 8.

8.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> INSPECTION END


CS

DRIVING FORCE IS HUNTING[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


DRIVING FORCE IS HUNTING


The vehicle causes hunting when the ICC system is active.



1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT-III. 2. Check if the DTC is detected in self-diagnosis results of “ENGINE”. Refer to EC-564, "DTC Index". Is any DTC detected?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT BODY WINDOW

1. Check the vehicle driving conditions. Refer to CCS-125, "Description".2. Check the ICC sensor integrated unit body window for contamination, foreign materials, or cracks. Refer

to CCS-125, "Diagnosis Procedure".

>> INSPECTION END

3.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS

Repair or replace malfunctioning parts identified by the self-diagnosis result.

>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> INSPECTION END


[ICC]

FREQUENTLY CANNOT DETECT THE VEHICLE AHEAD / DETECTION ZONE IS SHORT


FREQUENTLY CANNOT DETECT THE VEHICLE AHEAD / DETECTIONZONE IS SHORT


The detection function may become unstable in the following cases.• When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is deficient/ not clean enough to reflect the radar.• When driving a road with extremely sharp corners. • When the sensor cannot detect the reflector of the vehicle ahead as the vehicle ahead is passing a hill or

passing the peak.


1.VISUAL CHECK (1)

Check ICC sensor integrated unit body window for contamination and/or foreign materials. Do foreign materials adhere?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> GO TO 3.

2.REMOVE DIRT AND FOREIGN MATERIALS

Remove the contamination and foreign materials from the ICC sensor integrated unit body window.

>> GO TO 6.

3.VISUAL CHECK (2)

Check ICC sensor integrated unit body window for cracks and scratches.Are there any cracks or scratches?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> GO TO 4.


1. Adjust the laser beam aiming. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description". 2. Perform ICC system action test. Refer to CCS-12, "ACTION TEST : Description". 3. Check that the vehicle ahead detection performance improves. Does it improve?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 5.


1. Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".2. Adjust the laser beam aiming. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description".

>> GO TO 6.

6.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> INSPECTION END


CS

THE SYSTEM DOES NOT DETECT THE VEHICLE AHEAD AT ALL[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


THE SYSTEM DOES NOT DETECT THE VEHICLE AHEAD AT ALL


When ICC system is active, the ICC system does not perform any control even through there is a vehicleahead.


1.CHECK ICC SYSTEM DISPLAY ON MULTI INFORMATION DISPLAY

1. Start the self-diagnosis mode of combination meter. Refer to MWI-35, "Diagnosis Description". 2. Check that the multi information display turns on normally.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace the combination meter.

2.VISUAL CHECK (1)

Check ICC sensor integrated unit body window for contamination and/or foreign materials. Do foreign materials adhere?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> GO TO 4.

3.WIPE OUT DIRT AND FOREIGN MATERIALS

Wipe out the contamination and/or foreign materials from the ICC sensor integrated unit body window.

>> GO TO 7.

4.VISUAL CHECK (2)

Check ICC sensor integrated unit body window for cracks and/or scratches. Are there cracks?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> GO TO 5.


1. Adjust the laser beam aiming. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description". 2. Perform ICC system action test. Refer to CCS-12, "ACTION TEST : Description". 3. Check that the vehicle ahead detection performance improves. Does it improve?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 6.


1. Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".2. Adjust the laser beam aiming. Refer to CCS-6, "LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT : Description".

>> GO TO 7.

7.CHECK ICC SYSTEM



>> INSPECTION END


[ICC]NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION


PRECAUTIONS FOR VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODECAUTION:• ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is

the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.• The system is primarily intended for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advis-

able to use the system in city traffic or congested areas.• This system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly

flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or infog.

• The distance sensor will not detect under most conditions.- Stationary and slow moving vehicles.- Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.- Oncoming vehicles in the some lane.- Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane.• As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system.

This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving, or overcome poor visi-bility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal,depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to main-tain a safe distance between vehicles.

• Although the brake operation is controlled by the system, the system does not automatically stopthe vehicle. If the vehicle speed falls below approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH), the Intelligent CruiseControl system is automatically canceled and a warning chime sounds. (The brake control is alsocanceled.)

• The system may not detect the vehicle in front of the driver in certain road or weather conditions. Toavoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions:

- On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves.- On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.- During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

When the front wiper is operated at the low speed (LO) or high speed (HI) position, the ICC system isautomatically canceled.

- When strong light (for example, at sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle.- When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the system sensor.- On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may

result in overheating the brakes).- On repeated uphill and downhill roads.- When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of fre-

quent acceleration or deceleration.• Do not use the ICC system if own vehicle is towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle

ahead.• In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detec-

tion zone and cause automatic braking. The driver may need to control the distance from other vehi-cles using the accelerator pedal. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC system when it is notrecommended in this section.

• The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode uses a sensor located on the front of the vehicle todetect vehicles traveling ahead. The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the reflec-tors on a vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflector on the vehicle ahead, theICC system may not maintain the selected distance.

• The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot detect the signals:- When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is positioned high on the vehicle (trailer, etc.).- When the reflector on the vehicle ahead is missing, damaged or covered.- When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is covered with dirt, snow and road spray.- When the snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor's visibility.- When dense exhaust or other smoke (black smoke) from vehicles reduces the sensor's visibility.- When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the luggage room of own vehicle.• The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor's operation within the limitation of the

system. When the sensor is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will automatically be can-celed. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system


CS

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >may not detect them. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not can-cel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sureto check and clean the sensor regularly.

• The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn the driver when own vehicle approaches sta-tionary and slow moving vehicles. The driver must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintainproper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

• The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited. A vehicleahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicledistance detection mode to maintain the selected distancefrom the vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside ofthe detection zone due to its position within the same lane oftravel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same laneahead if they are traveling offset from the center line of thelane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not bedetected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane.If this occurs, the ICC system may warn the driver by blinkingthe system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver mayhave to manually control the proper distance away from vehi-cle traveling ahead.

• When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved,narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the ICCsensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may tempo-rarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause theICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The detec-tion of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation(steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) orvehicle condition. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn thedriver by blinking the system indicator and sounding thechime unexpectedly. The driver will have to manually controlthe proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

JPOIA0221ZZ

JPOIA0220ZZ


[ICC]NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >• When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a

slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC will adjust the speedto maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehi-cle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the free-way, the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed upto the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation tomaintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the setspeed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on windingor hilly roads. If this occurs, the driver will have to manuallycontrol the vehicle speed.

• The sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position inthe lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

• Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates ordecelerates own vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator toproperly accelerate own vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brakepedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sud-den braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

PRECAUTIONS FOR CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODECAUTION:• In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn the

driver if own vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle aheadnor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.

• Pay special attention to the distance between own vehicle and the vehicle ahead or a collision couldoccur.

• Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.• Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following

conditions:- when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed.- in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed.- on winding or hilly roads.- on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).- in very windy areas.• Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.• To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to the MAIN switch OFF when not using

ICC system.

JPOIA0219ZZ


CS

PRECAUTIONS[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTIONPRECAUTIONS

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004638346

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used alongwith a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certaintypes of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRSsystem uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one frontair bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of thisService Manual.WARNING:• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in

the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed byan authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.

• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personalinjury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air BagModule, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.

• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in thisService Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-ness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERSWARNING:• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the

ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possiblycausing serious injury.

• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect thebattery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Battery Service INFOID:0000000004691645

Before disconnecting the battery, lower both the driver and passenger windows. This will prevent any interfer-ence between the window edge and the vehicle when the door is opened/closed. During normal operation, thewindow slightly raises and lowers automatically to prevent any window to vehicle interference. The automaticwindow function will not work with the battery disconnected.

ICC System Service INFOID:0000000004638347

CAUTION:• Never look straight into the laser beam discharger when adjusting laser beam aiming.• Turn the MAIN switch OFF in conditions similar to driving, such as free rollers or a chassis dyna-

mometer.• Never use the ICC sensor integrated unit removed from vehicle. Never disassemble or remodel.• Erase DTC when replacing parts of ICC system, then check the operation of ICC system after adjust-

ing laser beam aiming if necessary.


[ICC]PREPARATION

< PREPARATION >

PREPARATIONPREPARATION

Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000004638348

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number (Kent-Moore No.)Tool name

Description

KV99110100(J-45718)ICC target board

Uses for laser beam aiming adjustment

PKIA0358J


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT

Exploded View INFOID:0000000004638349

CAUTION:Always perform the laser beam aiming adjustment and check the operation after the replacement,removal and installation of ICC sensor integrated unit.

NORMAL FRONT BUMPER FASCIA TYPE

SPORT FRONT BUMPER FASCIA TYPE

1. ICC sensor integrated unit

Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.

JSOIA0002ZZ

1. ICC sensor integrated unit


JSOIA0003ZZ




Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004638350

REMOVAL1. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-12, "Exploded View".2. Disconnect ICC sensor integrated unit connector. 3. Remove mounting bolts from ICC sensor integrated unit.4. Remove ICC sensor integrated unit.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:Always perform the laser beam aiming adjustment and check the operation after the replacement,removal, and installation of ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-6, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHENREPLACING CONTROL UNIT (ICC SENSOR INTEGRATED UNIT) : Description".


CS

ICC STEERING SWITCH[ICC]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

P

A

C


ICC STEERING SWITCH


Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".


ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL

C

D

E

BSECTION CHG

A

CHARGING SYSTEM

HG

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

O

P

N

CONTENTS

C


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .......... 3Work Flow .................................................................3

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 6

CHARGING SYSTEM .......................................... 6System Diagram ........................................................6System Description ...................................................6Component Parts Location ........................................6Component Description ............................................7

POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARI-ABLE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................. 8

System Diagram ........................................................8System Description ...................................................8Component Parts Location ........................................8Component Description .............................................9


B TERMINAL CIRCUIT ......................................10Description ..............................................................10Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................10

L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) .........................11Description ..............................................................11Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................11

L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) .......................13Description ..............................................................13Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................13

S TERMINAL CIRCUIT ......................................14Description ..............................................................14Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................14

CHARGING SYSTEM .........................................15Wiring Diagram - CHARGING SYSTEM - ...............15

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ..............................19

CHARGING SYSTEM .......................................19Symptom Table .......................................................19

PRECAUTION ..............................................20

PRECAUTIONS .................................................20Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" .................................................................20Precaution for Power Generation Voltage Variable Control System ........................................................20

PREPARATION ...........................................21

PREPARATION .................................................21Special Service Tools ..............................................21Commercial Service Tools .......................................21

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ........................22

CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY IN-SPECTION ........................................................22

Inspection Procedure ...............................................22

POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARI-ABLE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION IN-SPECTION ........................................................23

Inspection Procedure ...............................................23


ALTERNATOR ..................................................25

2WD ............................................................................252WD : Exploded View ..............................................252WD : Removal and Installation ..............................262WD : Inspection .....................................................27

AWD ...........................................................................27AWD : Exploded View .............................................27AWD : Removal and Installation ..............................28AWD : Inspection .....................................................29

CHG-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........................................................... 30

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 30

Alternator ................................................................ 30


HG

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C


BASIC INSPECTIONDIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW


OVEROALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW

JSMIA0009GB


< BASIC INSPECTION >NOTE:To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and alternator test segments must be doneas a set from start to finish.
1.PRELIMINARY INSPECTION

Perform the preliminary inspection. Refer to CHG-22, "Inspection Procedure".

>> GO TO 2.

2.STOP POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM

Stop the operation of the power generation voltage variable control in either of the following procedures.• After selecting “ENGINE” of “SELECT SYSTEM” using CONSULT-III, set the DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR

DUTY” to 0 % by selecting “ALTERNATOR DUTY” of “Active Test”. Continue “Active Test” until the end ofinspection. (When the DUTY value is 0 or 100 %, the normal power generation is performed according to thecharacteristic of the IC voltage regulator of the alternator.)

• Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the battery current sensor connector. [However, DTC (P1550 -P1554) of the engine might remain. After finishing the inspection, connect the battery current sensor connec-tor and erase the self-diagnostic results history of the engine using CONSULT-III.]

>> GO TO 3.

3.DIAGNOSIS WITH STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEM TESTER

Perform the charging system test using Starting/Charging System Tester (SST: J-44373). For details and oper-ating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin.Test resultCHARGING SYSTEM NOMAL>>Charging system is normal and will also show “DIODE RIPPLE” test result.NO CHARGING VOLTAGE>>GO TO 4.LOW CHARGING VOLTAGE>>GO TO 12.HIGH CHARGING VOLTAGE>>GO TO 14.DIODE RIPPLE NORMAL>>Diode ripple is OK and will also show “CHARGING VOLTAGE” test result.EXCESS RIPPLE DETECTED>>Replace the alternator. Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Starting/

Charging System Tester (SST: J-44373) to confirm repair.DIODE RIPPLE NOT DETECTED>>GO TO 4.

4.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IGNITION SWITCH IS ON)

Turn the ignition switch ON.Does the charge warning lamp illuminate?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> GO TO 5.

5.“L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) INSPECTION

Check “L” terminal circuit (open). Refer to CHG-11, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the “L” terminal circuit normal?YES >> Replace alternator.NO >> Repair as needed.

6.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IDLING)

Start the engine and run it at idle.Does the charge warning lamp turn OFF?YES >> GO TO 9.NO >> GO TO 7.

7.“L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) INSPECTION

Check “L” terminal circuit (short). Refer to CHG-13, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the “L” terminal circuit normal?YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Repair as needed.


HG


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C


8.“S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check “S” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-14, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the “S” terminal circuit normal?YES >> GO TO 10.NO >> Repair as needed.

9.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (ENGINE AT 3,000 RPM)

Increase and maintain the engine speed at 3,000 rpm.Does the charge warning lamp remain off?YES >> GO TO 11.NO >> GO TO 10.

10.INSPECTION OF ALTERNATOR PULLEY

Check alternator pulley. Refer to CHG-27, "2WD : Inspection" (2WD) or CHG-29, "AWD : Inspection" (AWD).Is alternator pulley normal?YES >> Replace alternator.NO >> Repair as needed.

11.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-10, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is “B” terminal circuit normal?YES >> Replace alternator.NO >> Repair as needed.

12.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-10, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is “B” terminal circuit normal?YES >> GO TO 13.NO >> Repair as needed.

13.INSPECTION OF ALTERNATOR PULLEY

Check alternator pulley. Refer to CHG-27, "2WD : Inspection" (2WD) or CHG-29, "AWD : Inspection" (AWD).Is alternator pulley normal?YES >> Replace alternator.NO >> Repair as needed.

14.“S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check “S” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-14, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the “S” terminal circuit normal?YES >> Replace alternator.NO >> Repair as needed.


CHARGING SYSTEM
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONCHARGING SYSTEM



The alternator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical system and to keep the battery charged.The voltage output is controlled by the IC voltage regulator.


JPMIA0633GB

1. Battery 2. IPDM E/R 3. Alternator

4. Charge warning lamp

A. Engine room dash panel (RH) B. Engine C. Combination meter

JSMIA0010ZZ


HG

CHARGING SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C



Component part Description

Alternator

“B” terminal Refer to CHG-10, "Description".

“S” terminal Refer to CHG-14, "Description".

“L” terminal Refer to CHG-11, "Description".

“C” terminalUsed for the power generation voltage variable control system. Refer to CHG-8, "System Description".

Combination meter (Charge warning lamp)

The IC voltage regulator warning function activates to illuminate the charge warning lamp, if any of the following symptoms occur while alternator is operating:• Excessive voltage is produced.• No voltage is produced.

IPDM E/RUsed for the power generation voltage variable control system. Refer to CHG-8, "System Description".


POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM



By performing the power generation voltage variable control, the engine load due to the power generation ofthe alternator is reduced and fuel consumption is decreased.NOTE:When any malfunction is detected in the power generation voltage variable control system, the power genera-tion is performed according to the characteristic of the IC voltage regulator of the alternator.


JPMIA0632GB

1. Battery 2. IPDM E/R 3. Battery current sensor

4. ECM 5. Alternator

A. Engine room dash panel (RH) B. Behind glove box C. Engine

JSMIA0011ZZ


HG


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C



Component part Description

Battery current sensor

Battery current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the neg-ative terminal, and it detects the charging/discharging current of the battery and sends the voltage signal to ECM according to the current value.

ECM

Battery current sensor detects the charging/discharging current of the battery. ECM judges the battery condition based on this signal.ECM judges whether to perform the power generation voltage variable control according to the battery condition.When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage according to the battery condition and sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to IPDM E/R.

IPDM E/RIPDM E/R converts the received power generation command val-ue into the power generation command signal (PWM signal) and sends it to the IC voltage regulator.

Alternator (IC voltage regulator)

IC voltage regulator controls the power generation voltage by the target power generation voltage based on the received power gen-eration command signal.When there is no power generation command signal, the alterna-tor performs the normal power generation according to the char-acteristic of the IC voltage regulator.


B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISB TERMINAL CIRCUIT


“B” terminal circuit supplies power to charge the battery and to operate the vehicle’s electrical system.


1.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check if “B” terminal is clean and tight.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair “B” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Starting/Charging system

test. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin.

2.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT

Check voltage between alternator “B” terminal and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Check harness for open between alternator and fusible link.

3.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)

1. Start engine, then engine running at idle and warm.2. Check voltage between battery positive terminal and alternator “B” terminal.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> “B” terminal circuit is normal. Refer to CHG-3, "Work Flow".NO >> Check harness between battery and alternator for poor continuity.

Terminals

Voltage (Approx.)(+)(–)

Alternator “B” terminal Terminal

E203 1 Ground Battery voltage

Terminals

Voltage (Approx.)(+)

(–)

Alternator “B” terminal Terminal

Battery positive terminal E203 1 Less than 0.2 V


HG

L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C




The “L” terminal circuit controls the charge warning lamp. The charge warning lamp illuminates when the igni-tion switch is set to ON or START. When the alternator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running,the charge warning lamp will go off. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunc-tion is indicated.


1.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CONNECTION

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check if “L” terminal is clean and tight.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair “L” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Starting/Charging system


2.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)

1. Disconnect alternator connector.2. Apply ground to alternator harness connector terminal.3. Check condition of the charge warning lamp with the ignition switch in the ON position.

Does it illuminate?YES >> “L” terminal circuit is normal. Refer to CHG-3, "Work Flow".NO >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)

1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.2. Disconnect the combination meter connector.3. Check continuity between alternator harness connector and combination meter harness connector.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair the harness or connector.

4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)

Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and fuse block.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair the harness.

5.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal.

Alternator harness connector TerminalGround

Condition

Ignition switch position Charge warning lamp

F36 2 ON illuminate

Alternator harness connector Combination meter harness connectorContinuity

Connector No. Terminal No. Connector No. Terminal No.

F36 2 M53 6 Existed

Combination meter harness connector Fuse blockContinuity

Connector No. Terminal No. Connector No. Terminal No.

M53 21 M3 12C Existed


< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >2. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace combination meter.NO >> Inspect the power supply circuit. Refer to PG-51, "Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -

".

Terminals

Condition Voltage (Approx.)(+)

(–)Combination meter harness connector

Terminal

M53 21 GroundWhen the ignition switch is in

ON positionBattery voltage


HG

L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C


L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT)


The “L” terminal circuit controls the charge warning lamp. The charge warning lamp illuminates when the igni-tion switch is set to ON or START. When the alternator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running,the charge warning lamp will go off. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunc-tion is indicated.


1.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT)

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect alternator connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.Does charge warning lamp illuminate?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Refer to CHG-3, "Work Flow".

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Disconnect combination meter connector.4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace combination meter.NO >> Repair the harness.

Combination meter harness connector

GroundContinuity

Connector No. Terminal No.

M53 6 Not existed


S TERMINAL CIRCUIT
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT


The output voltage of the alternator is controlled by the IC voltage regulator at the “S” terminal detecting theinput voltage.The “S” terminal circuit detects the battery voltage to adjust the alternator output voltage with the IC voltageregulator.


1.CHECK “S” TERMINAL CONNECTION

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check if “S” terminal is clean and tight.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair “S” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Starting/Charging system


2.CHECK “S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT

Check voltage between alternator harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Refer to CHG-3, "Work Flow".NO >> Check harness for open between alternator and fuse.

Terminals

Voltage (Approx.)(+)(–)

Alternator harness connector Terminal

F36 3 Ground Battery voltage


HG

CHARGING SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C


CHARGING SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram - CHARGING SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000004655552

JCMWM3068GB


CHARGING SYSTEM
JCMWM3069GB


HG

CHARGING SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C


JCMWM3070GB


CHARGING SYSTEM
JCMWM3071GB


HG

CHARGING SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C


SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISCHARGING SYSTEM

Symptom Table INFOID:0000000004655553

Symptom Reference

Discharged battery

Refer to CHG-3, "Work Flow".

The charge warning lamp does not illuminate when the ignition switch is set to ON.

The charge warning lamp does not turn OFF after the engine starts.

The charging warning lamp turns ON when increasing the engine speed.


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >









Precaution for Power Generation Voltage Variable Control System INFOID:0000000004655555

CAUTION:For this model, the battery current sensor that is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminalmeasures the charging/discharging current of the battery, and performs various controls. If the electri-cal component or the ground wire is connected directly to the battery terminal, the current other thanthat being measured with the battery current sensor is charging to or discharging from the battery.This condition causes the malfunction of the control, and then the battery discharge may occur. Donot connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal.


HG

PREPARATION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C

< PREPARATION >



Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000004655557

Tool number(Kent-Moore No.)Tool name

Description

—(J-44373 Model MCR620)Starting/Charging System Tester

Tests starting and charging systems.For operating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin.SEL403X

Tool name Description

Power tool

Loosening bolts, nuts and screws

PIIB1407E


CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCECHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION

Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000004655558

1.CHECK BATTERY TERMINALS CONNECTION

Check if battery terminals are clean and tight.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair battery terminals connection.

2.CHECK FUSE

Check for blown fuse and fusible link.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Be sure to eliminate the cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.

3.CHECK “E” TERMINAL CONNECTION(ALTERNATOR GROUND)

Check if “E” terminal (alternator ground) is clean and tight.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair “E” terminal (alternator ground) connection.

4.CHECK DRIVE BELT TENSION

Check drive belt tension. Refer to EM-13, "Checking".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair as needed.

Unit Power source (Power supply terminals) Fuse No.

Alternator Battery (“S” terminal) 32

Combination meter Ignition switch ON (“L” terminal) 4


HG

POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C


POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM OPER-ATION INSPECTION

Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000004655559

CAUTION:When performing this inspection, always use a charged battery that has completed the battery inspec-tion. (When the charging rate of the battery is low, the response speed of the voltage change willbecome slow. This can cause an incorrect inspection.)

1.CHECK ECM (CONSULT-III)

Perform ECM self-diagnosis with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-125, "CONSULT-III Function".Self-diagnostic results contentNo malfunction detected>> GO TO 2.Malfunction detected>> Check applicable parts, and repair or replace corresponding parts.

2.CHECK OPERATION OF POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Connect CONSULT-III and start the engine.2. The selector lever is in “P” or “N” position and all of the electric loads and A/C, etc. are turned OFF.3. Select “ALTERNATOR DUTY” at “Active Test” of “ENGINE”, and then check the value of “BATTERY

VOLT” monitor when DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR DUTY” is set to 40.0%.

4. Check the value of “BATTERY VOLT” monitor when DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR DUTY” is set to80.0%.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK IPDM E/R (CONSULT-III)

Perform IPDM E/R self-diagnosis with CONSULT-III. Refer to PCS-11, "CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)".Self-diagnostic results contentNo malfunction detected>> GO TO 4.Malfunction detected>> Check applicable parts, and repair or replace corresponding parts.

4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ALTERNATOR AND IPDM E/R

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect alternator connector and IPDM E/R connector.3. Check continuity between alternator harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.

4. Check continuity between alternator harness connector and ground.

“BATTERY VOLT”2 seconds after setting the DUTY value of “ALTERNA-TOR DUTY” to 40.0%

: 12 - 13.6 V

“BATTERY VOLT”20 seconds after setting the DUTY value of “ALTER-NATOR DUTY” to 80.0%

: +0.5 V or more against the value of “BATTERY VOLT” monitor when DUTY value is 40.0%

Alternator harness connector IPDM E/R harness connectorContinuity


F36 4 E7 76 Existed


POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.NO >> Repair harness or connector between IPDM E/R and alternator.

Alternator harness connector

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

F36 4 Not existed


HG

ALTERNATOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C


REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONALTERNATOR2WD

2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004655560

REMOVAL

DISASSEMBLY

Type: A003TJ1991

1. “B” terminal nut 2. “B” terminal harness 3. Alternator connector

4. Alternator mounting bolt 5. Alternator stay mounting bolt 6. Alternator stay

7. Alternator

: Engine front


JSMIA0089GB


ALTERNATOR
2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004655561

REMOVAL1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.2. Remove engine front undercover, using power tools. 3. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-16, "Exploded View". 4. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation". 5. Disconnect alternator connector (1).6. Remove “B” terminal nut (2).7. Remove the harness bracket bolts (A).

1. Rear bearing 2. Rotor assembly 3. Retainer

4. Front bearing 5. Front bracket assembly 6. Pulley

7. Pulley nut 8. Stator assembly 9. IC voltage regulator assembly

10. Diode assembly 11. Rear bracket assembly 12. Terminal set

13. “B” terminal nut


JSMIA0007GB

SKIB2605J


HG

ALTERNATOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >8. Remove oil pressure switch harness clip (C) from alternator stay

(1).9. Disconnect oil pressure switch connector (D) and oil tempera-

ture sensor connector (E).10. Remove alternator mounting bolt (B) and alternator stay mount-

ing bolt (F) using power tools, then remove alternator stay.11. Remove alternator mounting bolt (A), using power tools.

12. Remove alternator assembly downward from the vehicle.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:Be sure to tighten “B” terminal nut carefully.• Install alternator, and check tension of belt. Refer to EM-13, "Checking".• For this model, the power generation voltage variable control system that controls the power generation volt-

age of the alternator has been adopted. Therefore, the power generation voltage variable control systemoperation inspection should be performed after replacing the alternator, and then make sure that the systemoperates normally. Refer to CHG-23, "Inspection Procedure".

2WD : Inspection INFOID:0000000004655562

ALTERNATOR PULLEY INSPECTIONPerform the following.• Make sure that alternator pulley does not rattle.• Make sure that alternator pulley nut is tight. Refer to CHG-25, "2WD : Exploded View".AWD

AWD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004655563

REMOVAL

JSMIA0012ZZ

1. “B” terminal nut 2. “B” terminal harness 3. Alternator connector

4. Alternator mounting bolt 5. Alternator stay mounting bolt 6. Alternator stay

7. Alternator

JSMIA0089GB


ALTERNATOR
DISASSEMBLY

Type: A3TJ1991

AWD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004655564

REMOVAL1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.2. Remove air cleaner case (RH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".3. Remove the clip (B) from the harness bracket (1) and “B” termi-

nal harness from the clip (C).4. Disconnect pressure sensor connector (A).

5. Remove engine undercover, using power tools.

: Engine front


1. Rear bearing 2. Rotor assembly 3. Retainer

4. Front bearing 5. Front bracket assembly 6. Pulley

7. Pulley nut 8. Stator assembly 9. IC voltage regulator assembly

10. Diode assembly 11. Rear bracket assembly 12. Terminal set

13. “B” terminal nut


JSMIA0007GB

JSMIA0013ZZ


HG

ALTERNATOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

C

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >6. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-16, "Exploded View".7. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation". 8. Remove alternator mounting bolt (B) and alternator stay mount-

ing bolt (C) using power tools, then remove alternator stay (1).9. Remove alternator mounting bolt (A), using power tools.

10. Pull and turn alternator, and then remove the harness bracketbolts (A).

11. Disconnect alternator connector (1).12. Remove “B” terminal nut (2).

13. Remove alternator assembly downward from the vehicle.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:Be sure to tighten “B” terminal nut carefully.• Install alternator, and check tension of belt. Refer to EM-13, "Checking".• For this model, the power generation voltage variable control system that controls the power generation volt-

age of the alternator has been adopted. Therefore, the power generation voltage variable control systemoperation inspection should be performed after replacing the alternator, and then make sure that the systemoperates normally. Refer to CHG-23, "Inspection Procedure".

AWD : Inspection INFOID:0000000004655565

ALTERNATOR PULLEY INSPECTIONPerform the following.• Make sure that alternator pulley does not rattle.• Make sure that alternator pulley nut is tight. Refer to CHG-27, "AWD : Exploded View".

JSMIA0014ZZ

SKIB2608J


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Alternator INFOID:0000000004655566

*: Adjustment range of power generation voltage variable control is 11.4 - 15.6 V.

TypeA003TJ1991

MITSUBISHI make

Nominal rating [V - A] 12 -150

Ground polarity Negative

Minimum revolution under no-load (When 13.5 V is ap-plied)

[rpm] Less than 1,300

Hot output current (When 13.5 V is applied) [A/rpm]More than 31/1,300More than 122/2,500More than 144/5,000

Regulated output voltage [V] 14.1 - 14.7*

Minimum length of brush [mm (in)] More than 5.00 (0.197)

Brush spring pressure [N (g, oz)] 4.1 - 5.3 (418 - 541, 14.7 - 19.1)

Slip ring minimum outer diameter [mm (in)] More than 22.1 (0.870)

Rotor (Field coil) resistance [Ω] 1.7 - 2.0


TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

C

E

SECTION CLA

B

L
C
CLUTCH

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

CONTENTS

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 2

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 2

NVH Troubleshooting Chart ......................................2

PRECAUTION ............................................... 3

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3Service Notice or Precautions for Clutch ..................3

PREPARATION ............................................ 4

PREPARATION ................................................... 4Special Service Tools ................................................4Commercial Service Tools ........................................4

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 5

CLUTCH PEDAL ................................................. 5Inspection and Adjustment ........................................5

CLUTCH FLUID ................................................... 6Inspection ..................................................................6Air Bleeding Procedure .............................................6

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 7

CLUTCH PEDAL ................................................. 7Exploded View ..........................................................7Removal and Installation ...........................................7Inspection and Adjustment ........................................8

CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER ........................... 9

Exploded View .......................................................... 9Removal and Installation .......................................... 9Disassembly and Assembly .....................................11Inspection and Adjustment ......................................12

CLUTCH PIPING ...............................................13Exploded View .........................................................13Hydraulic Layout ......................................................13Removal and Installation .........................................14Inspection and Adjustment ......................................14

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ......15

CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER) .......15Exploded View .........................................................15Removal and Installation .........................................15Inspection and Adjustment ......................................18

CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER ............19Exploded View .........................................................19Removal and Installation .........................................19Inspection ................................................................20


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .................................................................22

Clutch Control System .............................................22Clutch Pedal ............................................................22Clutch Master Cylinder ............................................22Clutch Disc ..............................................................22Clutch Cover ............................................................22

CL-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISNOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000004256835

Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If nec-essary, repair or replace these parts.

SUSPECTED PARTS (Possible cause)

CLU

TC

H P

ED

AL

(Ins

pect

ion

and

adju

stm

ent)

CLU

TC

H L

INE

(A

ir in

line

)

MA

ST

ER

CY

LIN

DE

R P

IST

ON

CU

P (

Dam

aged

)

EN

GIN

E M

OU

NT

ING

(Lo

ose)

CS

C (

Con

cent

ric S

lave

Cyl

inde

r) (

Wor

n, d

irty

or d

amag

ed)

CLU

TC

H D

ISC

(O

ut o

f tru

e)

CLU

TC

H D

ISC

(R

unou

t is

exce

ssiv

e)

CLU

TC

H D

ISC

(Li

ning

bro

ken)

CLU

TC

H D

ISC

(D

irty

or b

urne

d)

CLU

TC

H D

ISC

(O

ily)

CLU

TC

H D

ISC

(W

orn

out)

CLU

TC

H D

ISC

(H

arde

ned)

CLU

TC

H D

ISC

(La

ck o

f spl

ine

grea

se)

DIA

PH

RA

GM

SP

RIN

G (

Dam

aged

)

DIA

PH

RA

GM

SP

RIN

G (

Out

of t

ip a

lignm

ent)

PR

ES

SU

RE

PLA

TE

(D

isto

rtio

n)

FLY

WH

EE

L (D

isto

rtio

n)

Reference

CL-

5

CL-

6

CL-

9

EM

-69

CL-

15

CL-

19

EM

-131

Symptom

Clutch grabs/chatters 1 2 2 2 2 2

Clutch pedal spongy 1 2 2

Clutch noisy 1

Clutch slips 1 2 2 3 4 5

Clutch does not disengage 1 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 6


PRECAUTIONS

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

L

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

C


Service Notice or Precautions for Clutch INFOID:0000000004256836

CAUTION:• Clutch fluid use refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".• Never reuse drained clutch fluid.• Never splash clutch fluid on painted areas.• When removing clutch tube, use a flare nut wrench.• When installing clutch tube, use a flare nut torque wrench

[Commercial service tool].• Use new clutch fluid to clean or wash all parts of master cylin-

der.• Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. It will

ruin the rubber parts of the hydraulic system.• Never reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) body and CSC

tube. Because CSC slides back to the original position everytime when removing transmission assembly. At this timing,dust on the sliding parts may damage a seal of CSC and maycause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-15, "Removal andInstallation".

• Never disassemble CSC body.WARNING:After cleaning clutch disc, wipe it with a dust collector. Never use compressed air.

SBR686C


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >


The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.


Tool number(Kent-Moore No.)Tool name

Description

ST20050240( - )Diaphragm adjusting wrench

Adjusting unevenness of diaphragm spring of clutch cover

ZZA0508D


1. Flare nut crowfoota: 10 mm (0.39 in)2. Torque wrench

Installing clutch tube

Clutch aligner1. Center shaft2. Attachment3. Guide

Installing clutch disc

Drifta: 10 mm (0.39 in) dia.

Removing bushing

Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

S-NT360

PCIB0017E

S-NT063

PBIC0190E


CLUTCH PEDAL

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

L

N

O

P


C

PERIODIC MAINTENANCECLUTCH PEDAL

Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004256839

INSPECTION1. Make sure that clevis pin (1) floats freely in the bore of clutch

pedal. It should not be bound by clevis or clutch pedal.a. If clevis pin is not free, make sure that ASCD clutch switch (2) is

not applying pressure to clutch pedal causing clevis pin to bind.To adjust, loosen lock nut (3) and turn ASCD clutch switch.

b. Tighten lock nut. Refer to CL-7, "Exploded View".c. Make sure that clevis pin floats in the bore of clutch pedal. It

should not be bound by clutch pedal.d. If clevis pin is still not free, remove clevis pin and check for

deformation or damage. Replace clevis pin if necessary. Leaveclevis pin removed for step 2.

2. Check clutch pedal stroke for free range of movement.a. With clevis pin removed, manually move clutch pedal up and down to determine if it moves freely.b. If any sticking is found, replace related parts (bushing, clutch pedal assembly, etc.). Reassemble clutch

pedal and again make sure that clevis pin floats freely in the bore of clutch pedal.3. Check clutch hydraulic and system components (clutch master cylinder, CSC, etc.) for sticking or binding.a. If any sticking or binding is found, repair or replace related parts as necessary.b. If hydraulic system repair was necessary, bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-6, "Air Bleeding

Procedure".NOTE:Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. Use of vacuum assist orpower bleeder will not purge all the air from the system.

ADJUSTMENT1. Adjust clutch interlock switch (1) position so that clearance

between stopper rubber (2) and thread end (A) of clutch inter-lock switch with clutch pedal depressed is clearance “C”.

2. After adjusting clearance “C”, tighten lock nut (3) to the specifiedtorque. Refer to CL-7, "Exploded View".

JPDIB0001ZZ

Standard value Clearance “C” : Refer to CL-22, "Clutch Pedal".

JPDIB0002ZZ


CLUTCH FLUID
CLUTCH FLUID

Inspection INFOID:0000000004256840

CLUTCH FLUID LEVEL• Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified

range (MAX – MIN lines).• Visually check for any clutch fluid leakage around the reservoir

tank.• Check the clutch system for any leakage if the fluid level is

extremely low (lower than MIN).

Air Bleeding Procedure INFOID:0000000004256841

CAUTION:• Monitor clutch fluid level in reservoir tank to make sure it does not empty.• Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately

and wash the affected area with water.NOTE:Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. Use of vacuum assist or powerbleeder will not purge all the air from the system.1. Fill master cylinder reservoir tank with new clutch fluid.2. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder valve.3. Depress clutch pedal slowly and fully several times at an interval

of 2 to 3 seconds and hold it.4. With clutch pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release

air. 5. Close air bleeder valve.6. Release clutch pedal and wait for 5 seconds.7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 until no bubbles can be observed in clutch

fluid.8. Tighten air bleeder valve to the specified torque. Refer to CL-15,

"Exploded View".

JPDIB0032ZZ

JPDIB0006ZZ


CLUTCH PEDAL

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

L

N

O

P


C

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONCLUTCH PEDAL



REMOVAL1. Remove kicking plate inner and dash side finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".3. Remove bracket (1) and harness bracket (2).4. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch and clutch interlock switch con-

nectors and then remove clip of harness from clutch pedalassembly.

5. Remove snap pin and clevis pin.6. Remove clutch pedal assembly.7. Remove ASCD clutch switch, clutch interlock switch, and pedal

pad.8. Remove bushing using a suitable drift [Commercial service tool].9. Remove stopper rubbers and pedal stopper rubber using a suit-

able remover.

1. ASCD clutch switch 2. Clevis pin 3. Bushing

4. Stopper rubber 5. Pedal pad 6. Pedal stopper rubber

7. Snap pin 8. Clutch interlock switch 9. Clutch pedal assembly

: Apply lithium-based grease including molybdenum disulphide.

: Refer to CL-9, "Exploded View" for the tightening torque.

Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

JPDIB0142GB

JPDIB0005ZZ


CLUTCH PEDAL
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.Apply recommended grease to clevis pin and bushing.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVALCheck the following items and replace clutch pedal if necessary.• Check clutch pedal upper rivets (A) for deformation.

• Check the lapping length “L” of sub-bracket (B) and slide plate (C).

• Check clutch pedal for bend, damage, and cracks on the weldedparts.

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck the clutch pedal free play. Refer to CL-5, "Inspection and Adjustment".

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONAdjust the clutch interlock switch position. Refer to CL-5, "Inspection and Adjustment".

: Vehicle front

Lapping length “L” : More than 5 mm (0.20 in)

JPDIB0153ZZ


CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

L

N

O

P


C




REMOVALCAUTION:Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediatelyand wash the affected area with water.1. Remove brake master cylinder cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove brake booster pressure sensor. Refer to BR-36, "Removal and Installation".3. Drain clutch fluid in reservoir tank assembly.

1. Bracket 2. Reservoir tank assembly 3. Hose

4. Cylinder body 5. Packing 6. Clutch pedal assembly

7. Return spring 8. Piston assembly 9. Push rod

10. Stopper ring 11. Boot 12. Clevis

13. Snap pin 14. Clevis pin

1: Apply rubber lubricant.

2: Apply silicone grease.

3: Apply lithium-based grease including molybdenum disulphide.


JPDIB0180GB


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >4. Remove reservoir tank assembly.
5. Remove hose and clips from cylinder body and reservoir tankassembly.

6. Remove mounting bolts and washers and then bracket from res-ervoir tank assembly.

7. Remove ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer toBR-23, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".

8. Remove clutch tube using a flare nut wrench.9. Remove kicking plate inner and dash side finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".10. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".11. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from clevis and then separate it from clutch pedal assembly.12. Remove packing (1) and master cylinder assembly (2).

CAUTION:Never damage packing, brake booster, and dash lower.

INSTALLATIONCAUTION:Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediatelyand wash the affected area with water.1. Install packing (1) and master cylinder assembly (2).

CAUTION:• Never damage packing, brake booster, and dash lower.

• Be careful with the orientation of packing. The figure isthe view from the vehicle forward.

2. Connect clutch tube to master cylinder assembly and tempo-rarily tighten flare nut.

3. Install master cylinder assembly and then tighten mounting nutsto the specified torque.

4. Set clevis to clutch pedal assembly.5. Apply recommended grease to clevis pin and then insert clevis

pin to clevis.6. Attach snap pin to clevis pin.7. Install instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and

Installation".8. Install dash side finisher and kicking plate inner. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".

: Vehicle front

: Vehicle front

JPDIB0109ZZ

JPDIB0159ZZ

: Vehicle front

JPDIB0159ZZ

JPDIB0010ZZ



C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

L

N

O

P


C

9. Tighten clutch tube flare nut to the specified torque using a flare nut torque wrench [Commercial servicetool]. Refer to CL-13, "Exploded View".

10. Install ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BR-23, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".11. Install bracket, mounting bolts, and washers to reservoir tank assembly. Tighten mounting bolts to the

specified torque.12. Install hose (1) and clips to reservoir tank assembly (2) and cyl-

inder body (3).

CAUTION:Set hose with painted mark facing upward.

13. Install reservoir tank assembly.

14. Install brake booster pressure sensor. Refer to BR-36, "Removaland Installation".

15. Install brake master cylinder cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Removaland Installation".

Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000004657704

DISASSEMBLY1. Loosen push rod lock nut and then remove clevis and push rod lock nut.

NOTE:Clutch pedal height is controlled with position of clevis and cylinder body.

2. Remove boot.3. Remove stopper ring while holding push rod.4. Remove push rod, piston assembly, and return spring.

ASSEMBLY1. Apply rubber lubricant to the internal surface of cylinder body, the sliding surface and piston cup of piston

assembly.2. Insert return spring and piston assembly.3. Apply silicon grease to push rod.4. Install push rod.5. Install stopper ring while holding push rod.

CAUTION:Never reuse stopper ring.

: Painted mark

JPDIB0126ZZ

: Vehicle front

JPDIB0109ZZ

JPDIB0013ZZ


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >6. Install boot.7. Install push rod lock nut and clevis to push rod.8. Adjust the length “L” between clevis (1) and cylinder body (2) to
the standard value. Then tighten lock nut (3) to the specifiedtorque.


INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLYCheck for any of the conditions shown below. If any malfunction is found, replace the part concerned.• Damaged cylinder internal wall, foreign matter, wear, corrosion.• Damaged or deformed reservoir tank.• Settling of return spring.• Cracked or deformed boot.• Cracked or deformed packing.

ADJUSTMENT BEFORE INSTALLATIONCheck the length “L” between clevis (1) and cylinder body (2). Ifmeasurement is outside the standard value, adjust the length “L”between clevis and cylinder body to the standard value. Then tightenlock nut (3) to the specified torque.

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION• Check and adjust the clutch pedal. Refer to CL-5, "Inspection and Adjustment".• Bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-6, "Air Bleeding Procedure".

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATIONCheck the clutch fluid leakage and clutch fluid level. Refer to CL-6, "Inspection".

Standard value Length “L” : Refer to CL-22, "Clutch Master Cyl-

inder".

JPDIB0125ZZ

Standard valueLength “L” : Refer to CL-22, "Clutch Master Cyl-

inder".

JPDIB0125ZZ


CLUTCH PIPING

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

L

N

O

P


C

CLUTCH PIPING


Hydraulic Layout INFOID:0000000004256850

1. CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) as-sembly

2. Bracket 3. Clutch hose

4. Lock plate 5. Clutch tube 6. Connector

7. Master cylinder assembly

Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure.

JPDIB0152GB

1. CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) as-sembly

2. Clutch tube 3. Clutch hose

4. Connector 5. Master cylinder assembly

JPDIB0016ZZ


CLUTCH PIPING

CAUTION:Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediatelyand wash the affected area with water.

REMOVAL Refer to CL-13, "Exploded View" for removal procedure.

INSTALLATIONNote the following, and refer to CL-13, "Exploded View" for installation procedure.• To fix clutch hose on bracket, position clutch hose clasp on the

emboss of bracket and drive lock plate vertically from above.CAUTION:• Never bend or twist clutch hose.• Never scratch or damage clutch hose.

• Tighten clutch tube flare nut to the specified torque using a flarenut torque wrench [Commercial service tool].CAUTION:Never damage flare nut and clutch tube.


ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONBleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-6, "Air Bleeding Procedure".


PCIB0681E


CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

L

N

O

P

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

C

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONCSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)



CAUTION:• Never reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) body and CSC tube. Because CSC slides back to the

original position every time when removing transmission assembly. At this timing, dust on the slid-ing parts may damage a seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage.

• Never disassemble CSC body.• Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately

and wash the affected area with water.

REMOVAL1. Remove transmission assembly from the engine. Refer to TM-26, "Removal and Installation".

JPDIB0127GB

1. Transmission assembly 2. CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) body

3. Dust cover

4. CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) tube

5. Air bleeder valve 6. Bracket

Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure.


2. Remove bracket mounting bolt ( ).

3. Pull up the lock pin of the CSC body.

4. Pull out the CSC tube (1) from the CSC body (2).5. Remove CSC tube and dust cover from transmission case.6. Remove air bleeder valve and bracket from CSC tube.

7. Remove CSC body from transmission case.

INSTALLATION

JPDIB0012ZZ

JPDIB0019ZZ

JPDIB0031ZZ

JPDIB0020ZZ



C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

L

N

O

P


C

1. Install CSC body to transmission case and then tighten mount-ing bolts ( ) to the specified torque.CAUTION:• Never reuse CSC body.• Never insert and operate CSC body because piston and

stopper of CSC body components may fall off.

2. Install dust cover to transmission case.

CAUTION:Be careful with the orientation of dust cover.

3. Insert CSC tube to dust cover.CAUTION:• Never reuse CSC tube.• Never damage O-ring of CSC tube.

4. Press down the lock pin of the CSC body.

5. Insert the CSC tube (1) into the connector of the CSC body (2)until it clicks.

6. Install bracket mounting bolts ( ) and then tighten mountingbolts to the specified torque in the order shown in the figure.

JPDIB0020ZZ

: Vehicle front

JPDIB0021ZZ

JPDIB0023ZZ

JPDIB0031ZZ

JPDIB0129ZZ


CAUTION:• Check that CSC tube’s (B) and bracket (1) are fit tightly

before tightening the mounting bolt (A).• Tighten the mounting bolt within the range of bracket’s

mounting hole.• After replacing the CSC tube, the mounting bolt (C) is still

temporary tightening. Never forget tightening the mount-ing bolt.

7. Install air bleeder valve to CSC tube and then tighten air bleedervalve to the specified torque.

8. Install transmission assembly to the engine. Refer to TM-26,"Removal and Installation".


ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONBleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-6, "Air Bleeding Procedure".


JPDIB0128ZZ


CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

L

N

O

P


C



CAUTION:

• Never reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) body and CSC tube. Because CSC slides back to the original position everytime when removing transmission assembly. At this timing, dust on the sliding parts may damage a seal of CSC and maycause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-15, "Removal and Installation".

• Never bring any grease to the clutch disc facing, pressure plate surface and flywheel surface.

• When installing, be careful that grease applied to main drive gear does not adhere to clutch disc.

• Never clean clutch disc using solvent.

• If flywheel is removed, align dowel pin with the smallest hole of flywheel. Refer to EM-122, "Disassembly and Assembly".


CAUTION:Never reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) body and CSC tube. Because CSC slides back to theoriginal position every time when removing transmission assembly. At this timing, dust on the slidingparts may damage a seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-15, "Removal andInstallation".

REMOVAL1. Remove transmission assembly from the engine. Refer to TM-26, "Removal and Installation".2. Loosen clutch cover mounting bolts with power tool [Commercial service tool].3. Remove clutch cover and clutch disc.

CAUTION:Never drop clutch disc.

INSTALLATION1. Clean clutch disc and main drive gear splines to remove grease and powder arisen from abrasion.2. Apply recommended grease to clutch disc and main drive gear splines.

CAUTION:

1. Flywheel 2. Clutch disc 3. Clutch cover

4. Main drive gear

A. First step B. Final step

: Replace the parts as a set.

: Apply lithium-based grease including molybdenum disulphide.


JPDIB0024GB


Be sure to apply grease to the points specified. Otherwise, noise, poor disengagement, or damageto the clutch may result. Excessive grease may cause slip or judder. And if it adheres to seal ofCSC body, it cause clutch fluid leakage. Wipe out excess grease. Wipe out any grease oozing fromthe parts.

3. Install clutch disc using a clutch aligner [Commercial servicetool].CAUTION:If either clutch disc or clutch cover is needed to bereplaced, replace them as a set.

4. Install clutch cover. Temporarily tighten clutch cover mountingbolts.CAUTION:If either clutch disc or clutch cover is needed to bereplaced, replace them as a set.

5. Tighten clutch cover mounting bolts evenly in two steps in theorder shown in the figure.

6. Install transmission assembly to the engine. Refer to TM-26, "Removal and Installation".


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

CLUTCH DISC• Measure circumferential runout relative to clutch disc center spline.

If it is outside the specification, replace clutch disc and clutch coveras a set.

• Measure backlash to clutch disc spline and main drive gear splineat the circumference of clutch disc. If it is outside the specification,replace clutch disc and clutch cover as a set.

• Measure the depth “A” to clutch disc facing rivet heads using a cal-ipers. If it exceeds the allowable wear limit, replace clutch disc andclutch cover as a set.

CLUTCH COVERCheck diaphragm spring lever claws for unevenness with the leverstill on the vehicle. If they exceed the tolerance, adjust lever heightusing the diaphragm adjusting wrench [SST: ST20050240 ( - )].

• Check clutch cover thrust ring for wear or breakage. If wear orbreakage is found, replace clutch disc and clutch cover as a set.NOTE:

SCIA6797E

Runout limit/diameter of the area to be measured

: Refer to CL-22, "Clutch Disc".

Maximum allowable spline backlash (at outer edge of disc)


Facing wear limit (depth to the rivet head) “A”


SCL221

JPDIB0026ZZ

Tolerance for diaphragm spring lever unevenness

: Refer to CL-22, "Clutch Cover".

PCIB0276E



C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

L

N

O

P


C

• Worn thrust ring will generate a beating noise when tapped at the rivet with a hammer.• Broken thrust ring will make a clinking sound when cover is shaken up and down.

• If a trace of burn or discoloration is found on the clutch cover pressure plate to clutch disc contact surface,repair the surface with sandpaper. If surface is damaged or distorted, replace clutch disc and clutch cover asa set.



Clutch Control System INFOID:0000000004256857

Clutch Pedal INFOID:0000000004256858

Unit: mm (in)

Clutch Master Cylinder INFOID:0000000004256859

Unit: mm (in)

Clutch Disc INFOID:0000000004256860

Unit: mm (in)

Clutch Cover INFOID:0000000004256861

Type of clutch control Hydraulic

Clearance “C” between pedal stopper rubber and clutch interlock switch threaded while clutch pedal is fully depressed.

0.1 – 1.0 (0.004 – 0.039)

Inner diameter 17.46 (11/16)

Standard length “L” between clevis and cylinder body 133.55 ± 0.5 (5.26 ± 0.020)

JPDIB0029ZZ

Facing size (Outer dia. × Inner dia. × Thickness) 240 × 160 × 3.8 (9.45 × 6.30 × 0.150)

Runout limit/diameter of the area to be measured 1.0 (0.039) / 230 (9.06) dia.

Maximum allowable spline backlash (at outer edge of disc) 1.0 (0.039)

Facing wear limit (depth to the rivet head) 0.3 (0.012)

Tolerance for diaphragm spring lever unevenness 0.8 mm (0.031 in) or less

Diaphragm spring lever height 44.6 – 46.8 mm (1.756 – 1.843 in)

Set-load 10,300 N (1,050.6 kg, 2,315.4 lb)


ENGINE

C

D

E

SECTION COA

CO

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

CONTENTS


DESCRIPTION .................................................... 2Engine Cooling System ...........................................2Engine Cooling System Schematic .........................2

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 3

OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .................. 3Troubleshooting Chart ..............................................3

PRECAUTION ............................................... 5

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 5Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ...................................................................5Precaution for Battery Service ..................................5

PREPARATION ............................................ 6

PREPARATION ................................................... 6Commercial Service Tools .......................................6

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 7

ENGINE COOLANT ............................................ 7Inspection ..................................................................7Draining .....................................................................7Refilling .....................................................................8Flushing .....................................................................9

RADIATOR .........................................................11

RADIATOR CAP ........................................................11RADIATOR CAP : Inspection ..................................11

RADIATOR ................................................................11RADIATOR : Inspection ..........................................11


RADIATOR ........................................................13Exploded View .........................................................13Removal and Installation .........................................14Inspection ................................................................15

COOLING FAN ..................................................16Exploded View .........................................................16Removal and Installation .........................................16Disassembly and Assembly .....................................16Inspection ................................................................17

WATER PUMP ..................................................18Exploded View .........................................................18Removal and Installation .........................................18Inspection ................................................................20

WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEM-BLY ....................................................................21

Exploded View .........................................................21Removal and Installation .........................................21Inspection ................................................................21

WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING ..........23Exploded View .........................................................23Removal and Installation .........................................23Inspection ................................................................24


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .................................................................25

Periodical Maintenance Specification ....................25Radiator ...................................................................25Thermostat ..............................................................25

CO-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONDESCRIPTION

Engine Cooling System INFOID:0000000004250561

Engine Cooling System Schematic INFOID:0000000004250562

JPBIA1830GB

PBIC5028E


OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

O

N

P

O


C

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISOVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS

Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000004250563

Symptom Check items

Cooling sys-tem parts malfunction

Poor heat transfer

Water pump malfunction Worn or loose drive belt

—

Thermostat stuck closed —

Damaged fins

Dust contamination or pa-per clogging

Physical damage

Clogged radiator cooling tube

Excess foreign material (rust, dirt, sand, etc.)

Reduced air flow

Cooling fan does not oper-ate

Fan assembly —High resistance to fan rota-tion

Damaged fan blades

Damaged radiator shroud — — —

Improper engine coolant mixture ratio

— — —

Poor engine coolant quality — Engine coolant density —

Insufficient engine coolant

Engine coolant leakage

Cooling hoseLoose clamp

Cracked hose

Water pump Poor sealing

Radiator capLoose

Poor sealing

Radiator

O-ring for damage, deterio-ration or improper fitting

Cracked radiator tank

Cracked radiator core

Reservoir tank Cracked reservoir tank

Overflowing reservoir tankExhaust gas leakage into cooling system

Cylinder head deterioration

Cylinder head gasket deteri-oration


OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
Except cool-ing system parts mal-function

— Overload on engine

Abusive driving

High engine rpm under no load

Driving in low gear for ex-tended time

Driving at extremely high speed

Powertrain system malfunc-tion

—Installed improper size wheels and tires

Dragging brakes

Improper ignition timing

Blocked or restricted air flow

Blocked bumper —

—

Blocked radiator grille

Installed car brassiere

Mud contamination or paper clogging

Blocked radiator —

Blocked condenserBlocked air flow

Installed large fog lamp

Symptom Check items


PRECAUTIONS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

O

N

P

O

< PRECAUTION >

C













PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >



Power tool Loosening nuts and bolts

Radiator cap tester Checking radiator and radiator cap

Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and water outlet (front) filler necka: 28 (1.10) dia.b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.Unit: mm (in)

PBIC0190E

PBIC1982E

S-NT564


ENGINE COOLANT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

O

N

P

O


C

PERIODIC MAINTENANCEENGINE COOLANT


LEVEL • Check if the reservoir tank engine coolant level is within the “MIN”

to “MAX” when the engine is cool.

• Adjust the engine coolant level if necessary.• Check that the reservoir tank cap is tightened.

LEAKAGE• To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system with the

radiator cap tester and radiator cap tester adapter (commercialservice tool) (A).

WARNING:Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burnscould occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping fromwater inlet (front).CAUTION:Higher test pressure than specified may cause radiator dam-age.NOTE:In a case that engine coolant decreases, replenish radiator with engine coolant.

• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.

Draining INFOID:0000000004250568

WARNING:• To avoid being scalded, never change engine coolant when the engine is hot.• Wrap a thick cloth around radiator cap and carefully remove radiator cap. First, turn radiator cap a

quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then turn radiator cap all the way.1. Open radiator drain plug (2) at the bottom of radiator, and then

remove radiator cap.

When draining all of engine coolant in the system, open water drain plugs on cylinder block. Referto EM-79, "Setting".

2. Remove reservoir tank if necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing. 3. Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.

A : MAX

B : MIN

JPBIA0102ZZ

Testing pressure : Refer to CO-25, "Radiator".

JPBIA0411ZZ

1 : Engine under cover

A : Radiator drain plug hole

: Vehicle front

JPBIA0259ZZ


ENGINE COOLANT
If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-9, "Flushing".

Refilling INFOID:0000000004250569

1. Remove air cleaner case (LH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".2. Install reservoir tank if removed, and radiator drain plug.

CAUTION:Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.

If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-122, "Dis-assembly and Assembly".

3. Check that each hose clamp has been firmly tightened.4. Remove air relief plug (2) on radiator left side.

5. Remove air relief plug (1) on heater hose.

6. Fill radiator, and reservoir tank if removed, to specified level.• Pour engine coolant through engine coolant filler neck

slowly of less than 2 (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 lmp qt) a minuteto allow air in system to escape.

• Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant orequivalent mixed with water (distilled or demineralized).Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".

Tightening torque : Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".

1 : Reservoir tank

3 : Engine cover

: Vehicle front

JPBIA0260ZZ

2 : Heater hose

: Vehicle front

JPBIA0104ZZ

Engine coolant capacity : Refer to CO-25, "Periodical Maintenance Specification".

(With reservoir tank at “MAX” level) JPBIA0412ZZ

Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity :Refer to CO-25, "Periodical Maintenance Specification"(At “MAX” level)


ENGINE COOLANT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

O

N

P

O


C7. When engine coolant overflows air relief hole on radiator, install

air relief plug with new O-ring.

8. Repeat step 6.9. When engine coolant overflows air relief hole on heater hose, install air relief plug with new O-ring. Then

refill radiator with engine coolant.

10. Install air cleaner case (LH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".11. Install radiator cap.12. Warm up engine until opening thermostat. Standard for warming-up time is approximately 10 minutes at

3,000 rpm.• Check thermostat opening condition by touching radiator hose (lower) to see a flow of warm water.CAUTION:Watch water temperature gauge so as not to overheat engine.

13. Stop the engine and cool down to less than approximately 50°C (122°F).• Cool down using fan to reduce the time.• If necessary, refill radiator up to filler neck with engine coolant.

14. Refill reservoir tank to “MAX” level line with engine coolant.15. Repeat steps 11 through 14 two or more times with radiator cap installed until engine coolant level no

longer drops. 16. Check cooling system for leakage with engine running.17. Warm up the engine, and check for sound of engine coolant flow while running engine from idle up to

3,000 rpm with heater temperature controller set at several position between “COOL” and “WARM”.• Sound may be noticeable at heater unit.

18. Repeat step 17 three times.19. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating step 6, and steps from 11 to 18 until engine

coolant level no longer drops. 20. Check that the reservoir tank cap is tightened.

Flushing INFOID:0000000004250570

1. Install reservoir tank if removed, and radiator drain plug.CAUTION:Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.

If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-121,"Exploded View".

A : MAX

B : MIN


JPBIA0102ZZ

: 1.2 N·m (0.12 kg-m, 11 in-lb)



ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >2. Remove air relief plug (1) on heater hose (2).
3. Remove air relief plug (2) on radiator.

4. Fill radiator with water until water spills from the air relief holes, then close air relief plugs. Fill radiator andreservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap.

5. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.6. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.7. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.8. Drain water from the system. Refer to CO-7, "Draining".9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 until clear water begins to drain from radiator.10. Check that the reservoir tank cap is tightened.

: Vehicle front

JPBIA0104ZZ

1 : Reservoir tank

3 : Engine cover

: Vehicle front

JPBIA0260ZZ



RADIATOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

O

N

P

O


C

RADIATORRADIATOR CAP

RADIATOR CAP : Inspection INFOID:0000000004250571

• Check valve seat (A) of radiator cap.

- Check if valve seat is swollen to the extent that the edge of theplunger cannot be seen when watching it vertically from the top.

- Check if valve seat has no soil and damage.

• Pull negative-pressure valve to open it, and check that it closecompletely when released.

- Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiatorcap negative-pressure valve.

- Check that there are no unusualness in the opening and closingconditions of negative-pressure valve.

• Check radiator cap relief pressure.

- When connecting radiator cap to the radiator cap tester and theradiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) (A), applyengine coolant to the cap seal surface.

• Replace radiator cap if there is an unusualness related to the above three.CAUTION:When installing radiator cap, thoroughly wipe out the water outlet (front) filler neck to remove anywaxy residue or foreign material.RADIATOR

RADIATOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000004250572

Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows:• Be careful not to bend or damage radiator fins.• When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as radiator cooling fan assem-

bly and horns. Then tape harness and connectors to prevent water from entering.1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward.2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute.3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from radiator.4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward.

B : Metal plunger

JPBIA0108ZZ

SMA967B

Standard and limit : Refer to CO-25, "Radiator".

JPBIA0109ZZ


RADIATOR
• Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 in). 5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out.


RADIATOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

O

N

P

O


C

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONRADIATOR


1. Upper mount bracket 2. Mounting rubber (upper) 3. Radiator & condenser assembly

4. Condenser pipe assembly 5. O-ring 6. O-ring

7. Clamp 8. A/T fluid cooler hose (A/T models) 9. A/T fluid cooler hose (A/T models)

10. Mounting rubber (lower) 11. Clamp 12. Radiator hose (lower)

13. Radiator hose (Upper) 14. Water drain hose 15. Drain plug

16. O-ring 17. Radiator water inlet pipe 18. O-ring

19. O-ring 20. Air relief plug 21. Reservoir tank cap

22. Reservoir tank 23. Reservoir tank hose 24. Clamp

25. Reservoir tank hose 26. Grommet 27. Radiator cooling fan assembly

A. To transmission B. To water inlet and thermostat assembly C. To water outlet

D. Refer to HA-41, "Exploded View"


JPBIA1515GB


RADIATOR

REMOVALWARNING:Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure enginecoolant escaping from water inlet (front). Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter ofa turn to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way.1. Remove the following parts:

• Engine under cover with power tool.• Engine cover: Refer to EM-25, "Exploded View".• Air cleaner case (RH and LH): Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".• Reservoir tank: Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".• Radiator core support ornament, radiator core support center: Refer to DLK-212, "Exploded View".• Horn: Refer to HRN-6, "Exploded View".• Hood lock: Refer to DLK-209, "HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Exploded View".

2. Remove condenser pipe assembly. Refer to HA-47, "Exploded View".3. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-7, "Draining".

CAUTION:• Perform this step when the engine is cold.• Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.

4. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler hoses from radiator. (A/T models)• Install blind plug to avoid leakage of A/T fluid.

5. Remove radiator hoses (upper and lower) and reservoir tank hose.CAUTION:Be careful not to allow engine coolant to contact drive belt.

6. Remove cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-16, "Exploded View".CAUTION:Never damage or scratch radiator & condenser assembly core when removing.

7. Rotate two radiator upper mount brackets 90 degrees in direc-tion as shown in the figure, and remove them.

8. Remove radiator & condenser assembly as follows:CAUTION:Be careful not to damage radiator & condenser assembly core.

a. Lift up and pull the radiator & condenser assembly (1) forward,and then remove the mounting rubber (lower) (3) from the radia-tor core support (2).

1 : Radiator upper mount bracket

A : Turn 90° counterclockwise

JPBIA0105ZZ

: Vehicle front

JPBIA0106ZZ


RADIATOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

O

N

P

O


C

b. Remove radiator & condenser assembly (1) from front of radia-tor core support (2).

INSTALLATIONInstallation is the reverse order of removal.


INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION• Check that the reservoir tank cap is tightened.• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter and the radiator cap tester (com-

mercial service tool). Refer to CO-7, "Inspection".• Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant and A/T fluid (A/T

models).

: Vehicle front

JPBIA0107ZZ


COOLING FAN
COOLING FAN



REMOVAL1. Remove reservoir tank. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".2. Remove air cleaner case (LH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".3. Disconnect harness connector from cooling fan control module, and move harness to aside.4. Remove engine under cover with power tool.5. Remove cooling fan assembly from under the vehicle.

CAUTION:Be careful not to damage or scratch on radiator core.

INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:Only use genuine parts for cooling fan mounting bolt and observe the specified torque (to preventcore support from being damaged).

Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000004250578

DISASSEMBLY1. Disconnect harness from cooling fan control module.2. Remove cooling fan control module from cooling fan assembly.

CAUTION:Handle carefully to avoid dropping and shocks.

3. Remove cooling fan mounting nuts, and then remove the cooling fan (RH and LH).4. Remove fan motors (RH and LH).

ASSEMBLY

1. Cooling fan (RH) 2. Cooling fan (LH) 3. Fan shroud

4. Fan motor (LH) 5. Fan motor (RH) 6. Cooling fan control module

A. Apply on fan motor shaft

: Apply Genuine High Strength thread Locking Sealant or equivalent.


JPBIA0240GB


COOLING FAN

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

O

N

P

O


C

Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.CAUTION:RH and LH cooling fans are different. Be careful not to misassemble them.• Install each fan in the following position.

• Secure the harness tightly to the fan shroud to prevent the fan rotation area from being loose.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVALCheck that fan motors operate normally.NOTE:Cooling fans are controlled by cooling fan control module. For details, refer to EC-74, "System Diagram".

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Cooling FanInspect cooling fan for crack or unusual bend.• If anything is found, replace cooling fan.

Right side : 9 bladesLeft side : 11 blades


WATER PUMP
WATER PUMP



CAUTION:• When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt.• Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.• After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leakage using the radi-

ator cap tester and the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool).

REMOVAL1. Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-25, "Exploded View". 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-614, "Inspection".3. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.4. Remove air duct and air cleaner case assembly (RH and LH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".5. Remove reservoir tank. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".6. Separate engine harness removing their brackets from front timing chain case.7. Remove engine undercover with power tool.8. Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Draining".

CAUTION:• Perform this step when the engine is cold.• Never spill engine oil on drive belt.

9. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-7, "Draining".CAUTION:• Perform this step when the engine is cold.• Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.

10. Remove cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-16, "Exploded View".11. Remove radiator hose (upper and lower). Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".12. Remove front timing chain case. Refer to EM-50, "Exploded View".

1. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 2. Water pump 3. O-ring

4. O-ring

A. Identify with yellow paint mark B.Identify with light blue paint markApply engine coolant


JPBIA1357GB


WATER PUMP

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

O

N

P

O


C

13. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) (1) as follows:a. Remove lower mounting bolt (A).b. Loosen upper mounting bolt (B) slowly, and then turn chain ten-

sioner (primary) on the upper mounting bolt so that plunger (C)is fully expanded.NOTE:Even if plunger is fully expanded, it is not dropped from the bodyof timing chain tensioner (primary).

c. Remove upper mounting bolt, and then remove timing chain tensioner (primary).

14. Remove water pump as follows:a. Remove three water pump mounting bolts. Secure a gap between water pump gear and timing chain, by

turning crankshaft counterclockwise until timing chain looseness on water pump sprocket becomes maxi-mum.

b. Screw M8 bolts (A) [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.049 in) length: approx. 50mm (1.97 in)] into water pumps upper and lower mounting boltholes until they reach timing chain case. Then, alternatelytighten each bolt for a half turn, and pull out water pump (1).CAUTION:• Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting

socket in installation area.• Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact

timing chain.c. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump.

CAUTION:Never disassemble water pump.

INSTALLATION1. Install new O-rings to water pump.

• Apply engine oil to O-ring (1) and engine coolant to O-ring (3)as shown in the figure.

• Locate O-ring with yellow paint mark (A) to front side.• Locate O-ring with light blue paint mark (B) to rear side.

2. Install water pump.CAUTION:Never allow cylinder block to nip O-rings when installing water pump.• Check timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged.• Insert water pump by tightening mounting bolts alternately and evenly.

3. Install timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows:a. Turn crankshaft clockwise so that timing chain on the timing chain tensioner (primary) side is loose.

JPBIA1537ZZ

JPBIA0111ZZ

2 : Water pump

JPBIA0112ZZ


WATER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >b. Pull plunger stopper tab (A) up (or turn lever downward) so as to
remove plunger stopper tab from the ratchet of plunger (D).NOTE:Plunger stopper tab and lever (C) are synchronized.

c. Push plunger into the inside of tensioner body.d. Hold plunger in the fully compressed position by engaging

plunger stopper tab with the tip of ratchet.e. To secure lever, insert stopper pin (E) through hole of lever into

tensioner body hole (B).• The lever parts and the tab are synchronized. Therefore, the

plunger will be secured under this condition.NOTE:Figure shows the example of 1.2 mm (0.047 in) diameter thin screwdriver being used as the stopper pin.

f. Install timing chain tensioner (primary).• Remove dust and foreign material completely from backside of timing chain tensioner (primary) and

from installation area of rear timing chain case.

g. Remove stopper pin.

h. Check again that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged.4. Install in the reverse order of removal for remaining parts.

• After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load topurge air from the high-pressure chamber of chain tensioner. Engine may produce a rattlingnoise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL• Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body assembly.• Check for rough operation due to excessive end play.• If anything is found, replace water pump.


mercial service tool). Refer to CO-7, "Inspection".• Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant.

JPBIA0118ZZ

SLC943A


WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

O

N

P

O


C




REMOVAL1. Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-25, "Exploded View".2. Remove air duct and air cleaner case assembly (LH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".3. Remove reservoir tank.Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".4. Remove engine undercover with power tool.5. Drain engine coolant from radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator. Refer to CO-7, "Draining".

CAUTION:• Perform this step when the engine is cold.• Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.

6. Disconnect radiator hose (lower).7. Disconnect intake valve timing control valve harness connector (LH), and remove intake valve timing con-

trol solenoid.8. Remove water inlet and thermostat assembly (1).

CAUTION:Never disassemble water inlet and thermostat assembly.Replace them as a unit, if necessary.

INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.• Be careful not to spill engine coolant over engine room. Use rag to absorb engine coolant.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

1. Gasket 2. Water inlet and thermostat assembly


JPBIA2743GB

A : Do not loosen these screw.

JPBIA0261ZZ


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >1. Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures. It should seat tightly.2. Check valve operation.
• If the malfunctioning condition, when valve seating at ordinaryroom temperature, or measured values are out of the standard,replace water inlet and thermostat assembly.



Thermostat (Standard) : Refer to CO-25, "Thermostat".

SLC949A


WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

O

N

P

O


C




REMOVAL1. Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-25, "Exploded View".2. Remove reservoir tank. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".3. Remove oil level gauge and guide. Refer to EM-82, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD models) or EM-85,

"AWD : Exploded View" (AWD models).4. Remove air duct and air cleaner case assembly (RH and LH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".5. Remove engine undercover with power tool.6. Drain engine coolant from radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator. Refer to CO-7, "Draining".

1. Clamp 2. Water hose 3. Harness bracket

4. Engine coolant temperature sensor 5. Heater hose 6. Clamp

7. Water outlet (rear) 8. Gasket 9. O-ring

10. Water outlet pipe 11. Water outlet (front) 12. Radiator cap

13. Clamp 14. Radiator hose (upper) 15. Gasket

16. Heater pipe 17. Clamp 18. Water hose

19. Water bypass pipe 20. Clamp 21. Water hose

22. Heater hose 23. O-ring

A. To EVAP piping B. To heater core C. To radiator

D. To electric throttle control actuator


JPBIA2339GB


CAUTION:• Perform this step when the engine is cold.• Never spill engine coolant on drive belts.

7. Remove radiator hose (upper) and heater hose.8. Separate engine harness removing their bracket from water outlet (rear).9. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor if necessary.

CAUTION:Be careful not to damage engine coolant temperature sensor.

10. Remove heater pipe, water bypass pipe and water outlet pipe.11. Remove water outlet (rear) if necessary.

NOTE:Removing engine assembly is required. Refer to EM-69, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD models) or EM-73,"AWD : Exploded View" (AWD models).

INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.• Securely insert each hose, and install clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe bulge.• When inserting water outlet pipe and water bypass pipe into water outlet, apply neutral detergent to O-ring.CAUTION:Never allow water outlet (rear) to nip O-rings when installing water outlet pipe and water bypass pipe.






C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

O

N

P

O


C


Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000004250589

ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)Unit: (US qt, Imp qt)

Radiator INFOID:0000000004250590

Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)

Thermostat INFOID:0000000004250591

Engine coolant capacity [With reservoir tank (“MAX” level)]A/T models 8.5 (9, 7-1/2)

M/T models 8.6 (9-1/8, 7-5/8)

Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity (At “MAX” level) 0.8 (7/8, 3/4)

Cap relief pressureStandard 122.3 - 151.7 (1.2 - 1.5, 18 - 22)

Limit 107 (1.1, 16)

Leakage testing pressure 157 (1.6, 23)

Thermostat Standard

Valve opening temperature 82°C (180°F)

Maximum valve lift 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F)

Valve closing temperature 77°C (171°F)


DRIVER CONTROLS

C

D

E

SECTION DEFA

B

DEFOGGER

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

EF

N

O

P

CONTENTS

D


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ......... 3Work Flow .................................................................3


REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM ............. 4System Diagram ........................................................4System Description ...................................................4Component Parts Location ........................................5Component Description .............................................5

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................. 7

COMMON ITEM ...........................................................7COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) .......................................................7

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER .....................................8REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER) ......................8


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ......10Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................10

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ............11Description ..............................................................11Component Function Check ....................................11Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................11

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY ..............12Description ..............................................................12Component Function Check ....................................12Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................12Component Inspection ............................................13

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ...........................14Description ..............................................................14Component Function Check ....................................14

Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................14Component Inspection .............................................16

DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER ...........................17Description ...............................................................17Component Function Check ....................................17Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................17

DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER ...19Description ...............................................................19Component Function Check ....................................19Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................19

PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOG-GER ...................................................................21

Description ...............................................................21Component Function Check ....................................21Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................21

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM ..........23Wiring Diagram - DEFOGGER CONTROL SYS-TEM - .......................................................................23

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ..............28

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) .................28Reference Value ......................................................28Wiring Diagram - BCM - ..........................................51Fail-safe ...................................................................56DTC Inspection Priority Chart ...............................58DTC Index ...............................................................60

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ..............................63

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE .........................................................63

Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................63

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DO NOT OPERATE. ....64

Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................64

DEF-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BUT BOTH DOOR MIRROR DE-FOGGERS OPERATE. ...................................... 65

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 65

DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OP-ERATE ............................................................... 66

BOTH SIDES ............................................................. 66BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 66

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 66DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 66

PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 66PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 66

ON IS NOT DISPLAYED WHEN PRESSING REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH BUT IT IS OPERATED ............................................... 67

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 67

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE .................................. 68

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 68

PRECAUTION ............................................ 69

PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 69Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ................................................................. 69Precaution for Battery Service ................................ 69

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 70

FILAMENT ......................................................... 70Inspection and Repair ............................................. 70

CONDENSER .................................................... 72Exploded View ........................................................ 72Removal and Installation ......................................... 72


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

BASIC INSPECTIONDIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW


DETAILED FLOW

1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM

Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-tion occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings the vehicle in.

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC

Perform self diagnosis with CONSULT-IIIIs any DTC detected?YES >> Refer to DEF-60, "DTC Index"NO >> GO TO 3.

3.REPRODUCE THE MALFUNCTION INFORMATION

Check the malfunction on the vehicle that the customer describes.Inspect the relation of the symptoms and the condition when the symptoms occur.

>> GO TO 4.

4.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS”

Use “Symptom diagnosis” from the symptom inspection result in step 3. Then identify where to start perform-ing the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.

>> GO TO 5.

5.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING PARTS WITH “COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS”

Perform the diagnosis with “Component diagnosis” of the applicable system.

>> GO TO 6.

6.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS

Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts.

>> GO TO 7.

7.FINAL CHECK

Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3.Are all malfunctions corrected?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 4.


REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONREAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM



Operation Description• Turn rear window defogger switch ON when the ignition switch is turned ON. Then multifunction switch (rear

window defogger switch) transmits rear window defogger switch signal to AV control unit via AV communica-tion. AV control unit transmits rear window defogger switch signal to BCM via CAN communication.

• BCM turns rear window defogger relay ON and transmit rear window defogger ON signal to IPDM E/R viaCAN communication when rear window defogger switch signal is received.

• Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger (with mirror defogger) are supplied with power and operatewhen rear window defogger relay turns ON.

• AV control unit transmit rear window defogger control signal to multifunction switch (rear window defoggerswitch) via AV communication.

• IPDM E/R transmits rear window defogger control signal to AV control unit via CAN communication.

Timer function• BCM turns rear window defogger relay ON for approximately 15 minutes when rear window defogger switch

is turned ON. It makes rear window defogger and door mirror defogger (with mirror defogger) operate.• Timer is canceled after pressing rear window defogger switch again during timer operation. Then BCM turns

rear window defogger relay OFF. The same reaction also occurs during timer operation, if the ignition switchis turned OFF.

JMLIA0005GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D



JMLIA0069ZZ

1. Rear window defogger relay 2. BCM M118, M119, M122, M123 3. IPDM E/R E6

4.Rear window defogger switch (built-in multifunction switch M72)

5. Rear window defogger connector B401, B402

6. Condenser B26

7.AV control unit• With NAVI: M87,M88• Without NAVI: M83, M85

A. Dash side lower (driver side) B. Dash side lower (passenger side) C. Engine room dash panel (RH)

D. Behind rear pillar finisher (LH) E. Behind cluster lid C

BCM• Operates the rear window defogger with the operation of rear window defogger switch• Performs the timer control of rear window defogger

Rear window defogger relayOperates the rear window defogger and the door mirror defogger with the control signal from BCM

IPDM E/R Transmit rear window defogger ON signal to AV control unit via CAN communication

Multifunction switch(Rear window defogger switch)

• The rear window defogger switch is installed• Turns the indicator lamp ON when detecting the operation of rear window defogger

AV control unitDisplays the rear window defogger ON to the display when detecting the operation of rear win-dow defogger

Rear window defoggerHeats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window defogger relay to prevent the rear window from fogging up

Door mirror defogger*Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window defogger relay to prevent the door mirror from fogging up


< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >*: With mirror defogger

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)COMMON ITEM

COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000004610468

APPLICATION ITEMCONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATIONBCM can perform the following functions for each system.NOTE:It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.

×: Applicable item

NOTE:

*: This item is displayed, but is not used.

FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays onCONSULT-III.

Diagnosis mode Function Description

Work Support Changes the setting for each system function.

Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.

CAN Diag Support MonitorMonitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Refer to CONSULT-III opera-tion manual.

Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed.

Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.

Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed.

Configuration This function is not used even though it is displayed.

System Sub system selection itemDiagnosis mode

Work Support Data Monitor Active Test

Door lock DOOR LOCK × × ×

Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × ×

Warning chime BUZZER × ×

Interior room lamp timer INT LAMP × × ×

Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×

Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × ×

— AIR CONDITONER*

• Intelligent Key system• Engine start system

INTELLIGENT KEY × × ×

Combination switch COMB SW ×

Body control system BCM ×

IVIS - NATS IMMU × ×

Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × ×

Trunk lid open TRUNK × ×

Vehicle security system THEFT ALM × × ×

RAP system RETAINED PWR* ×

Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × ×

TPMS TPMS (AIR PRESSURE MONITOR) × × ×


REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER)INFOID:0000000004249107

Data monitor

ACTIVE TEST

CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description

Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected

Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected

Vehicle Condition

SLEEP>LOCK

Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected

While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode (Power supply position is “LOCK”)

SLEEP>OFFWhile turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode (Power supply position is “OFF”.)

LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from “LOCK” to “ACC”

ACC>ON While turning power supply position from “ACC” to “IGN”

RUN>ACCWhile turning power supply position from “RUN” to “ACC” (Vehicle is stopping and selector lever is except P position.)

CRANK>RUNWhile turning power supply position from “CRANKING” to “RUN” (From cranking up the engine to run it)

RUN>URGENTWhile turning power supply position from “RUN“ to “ACC” (Emer-gency stop operation)

ACC>OFF While turning power supply position from “ACC” to “OFF”

OFF>LOCK While turning power supply position from “OFF” to “LOCK”

OFF>ACC While turning power supply position from “OFF” to “ACC”

ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from “IGN” to “CRANKING”

OFF>SLEEPWhile turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply posi-tion is “OFF”.) to low power consumption mode

LOCK>SLEEPWhile turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply posi-tion is “LOCK”.) to low power consumption mode

LOCKPower supply position is “LOCK” (Ignition switch OFF with steer-ing is locked.)

OFFPower supply position is “OFF” (Ignition switch OFF with steering is unlocked.)

ACC Power supply position is “ACC” (Ignition switch ACC)

ONPower supply position is “IGN” (Ignition switch ON with engine stopped)

ENGINE RUNPower supply position is “RUN” (Ignition switch ON with engine running)

CRANKING Power supply position is “CRANKING” (At engine cranking)

IGN Counter 0 - 39

The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition

whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.

Monitor Item Description

REAR DEF SW This is displayed even when it is not equipped.

PUSH SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push switch.



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

Test Item Description

REAR DEFOGGERThis test is able to check rear window defogger operation. Rear window defogger operates when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISPOWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


1.CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK

Check that the following fuse and fusible link are not blown.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is

blown.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connectors.3. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair harness or connector.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse and fusible link No.

1Battery power supply

K (40 A)

11 10 (10 A)

(+)

(−)Voltage

(Approx.)BCM

Connector Terminal

M118 1Ground Battery voltage

M119 11

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M119 13 Existed


REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH


• The rear window defogger is operated by turning the rear window defogger switch ON.• The indicator lamp in the rear window defogger illuminates when the rear window defogger is operating.


1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION

Check that the indicator lamp of rear window defogger illuminates when rear window defogger switch ON. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Rear window defogger switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to DEF-11, "Diagnosis Procedure"


1.CHECK MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH (REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH)

Does multifunction switch operate normally?• Base audio without navigation. Refer to AV-19, "Diagnosis Description"• BOSE audio without navigation. Refer to AV-138, "Diagnosis Description"• BOSE audio with navigation. Refer to AV-393, "Diagnosis Description"Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace multifunction switch (rear window defogger switch). Refer to AV-119, "Removal and

Installation"


REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY


Power is supplied to the rear window defogger with BCM control.


1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT-III.2. Touch “ON”.3. Check that the rear window heating wire is getting warmer.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Rear window defogger relay power supply circuit is OK.NO >> Refer to DEF-12, "Diagnosis Procedure"


1.CHECK FUSE

1. Turn ignition switch off.2. Check the following.- 10A fuse [No.3, located in fuse block (J/B)]Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.

2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 1

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> GO TO 3.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector and rear window defogger relay.3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and fuse block (J/B) harness connector.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace harness.

4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY

Check rear window defogger relay.Refer to DEF-13, "Component Inspection"Is the inspection result normal?

(+)

(–) ConditionVoltage (V)(Approx.)

BCM

Connector Terminal

M123 151 GroundRear window defogger switch

ON 0

OFF Battery voltage

BCM Fuse block (J/B)Continuity


M123 151 M2 4B Existed



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace rear window defogger relay.

5.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B)

1. Install the rear window defogger relay.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) (fuse block side) and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair or replace fuse block (J/B).

6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Check intermittent incident.Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident"

>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect rear window defogger relay.3. Check rear window defogger relay.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace rear window defogger relay.

(+)

(–)Voltage (V)(Approx.)

Fuse block (J/B)

Connector Terminal

M2 4B Ground Battery voltage

Terminal

Condition ContinuityRear window defogger relay

3 5

12 V direct current supply between termi-nals 1 and 2.

Existed

No current supply Not existed

SEF497Y




Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window defogger relay to prevent the rear windowfrom fogging up.


1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT-III.2. Touch “ON”.3. Check that the rear window heating wire is getting warmer.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Rear window defogger is OK.NO >> Refer to DEF-14, "Diagnosis Procedure"


1.CHECK FUSE

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check the following.- 20A fuse [No.14, located in fuse block (J/B)]- 20A fuse [No.15, located in fuse block (J/B)]Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.


1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between rear window defogger connector and ground.



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect rear window defogger connector.3. Check continuity between rear window defogger harness connector and ground.



(+)


Rear window defogger

Connector Terminal

B401 1 GroundRear window defogger switch

ON Battery voltage

OFF 0

Rear window defogger

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B402 2 Existed



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect condenser connector and rear window defogger connector.3. Check continuity between condenser (condenser side) and rear window defogger harness connector.

4. Check continuity between condenser (condenser side) connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace condenser. Refer to DEF-72, "Removal and Installation"


1. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.2. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and condenser harness connector.

3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and ground.



1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) (fuse block side) and ground.


7.CHECK FILAMENT

Check filament.Refer to DEF-16, "Component Inspection"

Condenser Rear window defoggerContinuity


B26 1 B401 1 Existed

Condenser

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B26 1 Not existed

Fuse block (J/B) CondenserContinuity


B610G

B26 1 Existed11G

Fuse block (J/B)

Ground

ContinuityConnector Terminal

B610G

Not existed11G

(+)


Fuse block (J/B)

Connector Terminal

B6

10G

GroundRear window defogger switch

ON Battery voltage

OFF 0

11GON Battery voltage

OFF 0


< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Repair filament.


>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK FILAMENT

Check the filament for damage or blown.Refer to DEF-70, "Inspection and Repair"Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair filament.


DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D



Power is supplied to the door mirror defogger with BCM control.


1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER

1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT-III.2. Touch “ON”.3. Check that both side door mirror glass is getting warmer.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Door mirror defogger is OK.NO >> Refer to DEF-17, "Diagnosis Procedure"


1.CHECK FUSE

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check 10A fuse [No.13, located in fuse block (J/B)].Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.


1. Disconnect door mirror (driver side) connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Check voltage between door mirror (driver side) harness connector and ground.


3.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and door mirror (driver side) harness con-

nector.


Is the inspection result normal?

(+)

(–) Condition Voltage (V)(Approx.)

Door mirror (driver side)

Connector Terminal

D3 4 GroundRear window defogger switch

ON Battery voltage

OFF 0

Fuse block (J/B) Door mirror (driver side)Continuity


M3 10C D3 4 Existed

Fuse block (J/B)

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M3 10C Not existed


< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace harness.

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) (fuse block side) and ground.



Check intermittent incident.Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

(+)


Fuse block (J/B)

Connector Terminal

M3 10C GroundRear window defogger switch

ON Battery voltage

OFF 0


DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D



Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window defogger relay to prevent the door mirrorfrom fogging up.


1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER

1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT-III.2. Touch “ON”.3. Check that the driver side door mirror glass is getting warmer.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Driver side door mirror defogger is OK.NO >> Refer to DEF-19, "Diagnosis Procedure"



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect door mirror (driver side) connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between door mirror (driver side) harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and door mirror (driver side) harness con-

nector.




1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check continuity between door mirror (driver side) harness connector and ground.

(+)



Connector Terminal


ON Battery voltage

OFF 0

Fuse block (J/B) Door mirror (driver side)Continuity


M3 10C D3 4 Existed

Fuse block (J/B)

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M3 10C Not existed


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace door mirror glass (driver side). Refer to MIR-19, "GLASS MIRROR : Disassembly and

Assembly"NO >> Repair or replace harness.


Check intermittent incident.Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident"Is the inspection result normal?

>> INSPECTION END


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

D3 8 Existed


PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D



Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window defogger relay to prevent the door mirrorfrom fogging up.


1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER

1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT-III.2. Touch “ON”.3. Check that the passenger side door mirror glass is getting warmer.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Passenger side door mirror defogger is OK.NO >> Refer to DEF-21, "Diagnosis Procedure"



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect door mirror (passenger side) connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between door mirror (passenger side) harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and door mirror (passenger side) harness

connector.




1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check continuity between door mirror (passenger side) harness connector and ground.

(+)


Door mirror (passenger side)

Connector Terminal


ON Battery voltage

OFF 0

Fuse block (J/B) Door mirror (passenger side)Continuity


M3 9C D33 4 Existed

Fuse block (J/B)

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M3 9C Not existed


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace door mirror glass (passenger side). Refer to MIR-19, "GLASS MIRROR : Disassembly

and Assembly"NO >> Repair or replace harness.



>> INSPECTION END

Door mirror (passenger side)

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

D33 8 Existed



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D


Wiring Diagram - DEFOGGER CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000004249132

JCLWM2726GB


JCLWM2727GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

JCLWM2728GB


JCLWM2729GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

JCLWM2730GB


BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATIONBCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)

Reference Value INFOID:0000000004610460

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM

Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

FR WIPER HIOther than front wiper switch HI Off

Front wiper switch HI On

FR WIPER LOWOther than front wiper switch LO Off

Front wiper switch LO On

FR WASHER SWFront washer switch OFF Off

Front washer switch ON On

FR WIPER INTOther than front wiper switch INT Off

Front wiper switch INT On

FR WIPER STOPFront wiper is not in STOP position Off

Front wiper is in STOP position On

INT VOLUME Wiper intermittent dial is in a dial position 1 - 7Wiper intermittent dial

position

TURN SIGNAL ROther than turn signal switch RH Off

Turn signal switch RH On

TURN SIGNAL LOther than turn signal switch LH Off

Turn signal switch LH On

TAIL LAMP SWOther than lighting switch 1ST and 2ND Off

Lighting switch 1ST or 2ND On

HI BEAM SWOther than lighting switch HI Off

Lighting switch HI On

HEAD LAMP SW 1Other than lighting switch 2ND Off

Lighting switch 2ND On

HEAD LAMP SW 2Other than lighting switch 2ND Off

Lighting switch 2ND On

PASSING SWOther than lighting switch PASS Off

Lighting switch PASS On

AUTO LIGHT SWOther than lighting switch AUTO Off

Lighting switch AUTO On

FR FOG SWFront fog lamp switch OFF Off

Front fog lamp switch ON On

RR FOG SWNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

DOOR SW-DRDriver door closed Off

Driver door opened On

DOOR SW-ASPassenger door closed Off

Passenger door opened On

DOOR SW-RRNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

DOOR SW-RLNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

DOOR SW-BKNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

CDL LOCK SWOther than power door lock switch LOCK Off

Power door lock switch LOCK On

CDL UNLOCK SWOther than power door lock switch UNLOCK Off

Power door lock switch UNLOCK On

KEY CYL LK-SWOther than driver door key cylinder LOCK position Off

Driver door key cylinder LOCK position On

KEY CYL UN-SWOther than driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position Off

Driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position On

KEY CYL SW-TRNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

HAZARD SWHazard switch is OFF Off

Hazard switch is ON On

REAR DEF SWNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

H/L WASH SWNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

TR CANCEL SWTrunk lid opener cancel switch OFF Off

Trunk lid opener cancel switch ON On

TR/BD OPEN SWTrunk lid opener switch OFF Off

While the trunk lid opener switch is turned ON On

TRNK/HAT MNTRTrunk lid closed Off

Trunk lid opened On

RKE-LOCKLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

LOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed On

RKE-UNLOCKUNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed On

RKE-TR/BDTRUNK OPEN button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

TRUNK OPEN button of the Intelligent Key is pressed On

RKE-PANICPANIC button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

PANIC button of the Intelligent Key is pressed On

RKE-P/W OPENUNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed and held On

RKE-MODE CHG

LOCK/UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed and held simulta-neously

Off

LOCK/UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed and held simultaneously On

OPTICAL SENSORBright outside of the vehicle Close to 5 V

Dark outside of the vehicle Close to 0 V

REQ SW -DRDriver door request switch is not pressed Off

Driver door request switch is pressed On

REQ SW -ASPassenger door request switch is not pressed Off

Passenger door request switch is pressed On

REQ SW -RRNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off



REQ SW -RLNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

REQ SW -BD/TRTrunk lid opener request switch is not pressed Off

Trunk lid opener request switch is pressed On

PUSH SWPush-button ignition switch (push switch) is not pressed Off

Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pressed On

IGN RLY2 -F/BIgnition switch in OFF or ACC position Off

Ignition switch in ON position On

ACC RLY -F/BNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

CLUCH SWThe clutch pedal is not depressed Off

The clutch pedal is depressed On

BRAKE SW 1

The brake pedal is depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown Off

The brake pedal is not depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown, or No. 7 fuse is nor-mal

On

BRAKE SW 2The brake pedal is not depressed Off

The brake pedal is depressed On

DETE/CANCL SW

• Selector lever in P position (Except M/T models)• The clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models)

Off

• Selector lever in any position other than P (Except M/T models)• The clutch pedal is not depressed (M/T models)

On

SFT PN/N SWSelector lever in any position other than P and N Off

Selector lever in P or N position On

S/L -LOCKSteering is unlocked Off

Steering is locked On

S/L -UNLOCKSteering is locked Off

Steering is unlocked On

S/L RELAY-F/BIgnition switch in OFF or ACC position Off


UNLK SEN -DRDriver door is unlocked Off

Driver door is locked On

PUSH SW -IPDMPush-button ignition switch (push-switch) is not pressed Off

Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is pressed On

IGN RLY1 -F/BIgnition switch in OFF or ACC position Off


DETE SW -IPDMSelector lever in any position other than P Off

Selector lever in P position On

SFT PN -IPDM

• Selector lever in any position other than P and N (Except M/T models)• The clutch pedal is not depressed (M/T models)

Off

• Selector lever in P or N position• The clutch pedal is depressed

On

SFT P -METSelector lever in any position other than P Off

Selector lever in P position On

SFT N -METSelector lever in any position other than N Off

Selector lever in N position On




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

ENGINE STATE

Engine stopped Stop

While the engine stalls Stall

At engine cranking Crank

Engine running Run

S/L LOCK-IPDMSteering is unlocked Off

Steering is locked On

S/L UNLK-IPDMSteering is locked Off

Steering is unlocked On

S/L RELAY-REQ

Steering lock system is not the LOCK condition and the changing condition from LOCK to UNLOCK

Off

Steering lock system are not the LOCK condition or the changing condition from LOCK to UNLOCK

On

VEH SPEED 1 While drivingEquivalent to speed-

ometer reading

VEH SPEED 2 While drivingEquivalent to speed-

ometer reading

DOOR STAT-DR

Driver door is locked LOCK

Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds) READY

Driver door is unlocked UNLOCK

DOOR STAT-AS

Passenger door is locked LOCK

Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds) READY

Passenger door is unlocked UNLOCK

ID OK FLAGSteering is locked Reset

Steering is unlocked Set

PRMT ENG STRTThe engine start is prohibited Reset

The engine start is permitted Set

PRMT RKE STRTNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Reset

KEY SW -SLOTThe Intelligent Key is not inserted into key slot Off

The Intelligent Key is inserted into key slot On

RKE OPE COUN1 During the operation of the Intelligent KeyOperation frequency of

the Intelligent Key

RKE OPE COUN2NOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

—

CONFRM ID ALL

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by any key ID registered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by any key ID registered to BCM.

Done

CONFIRM ID4

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the fourth key ID regis-tered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the fourth key ID registered to BCM.

Done

CONFIRM ID3

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the third key ID regis-tered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the third key ID registered to BCM.

Done



CONFIRM ID2

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the second key ID reg-istered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the second key ID regis-tered to BCM.

Done

CONFIRM ID1

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the first key ID regis-tered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the first key ID registered to BCM.

Done

TP 4The ID of fourth Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet

The ID of fourth Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done

TP 3The ID of third Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet

The ID of third Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done

TP 2The ID of second Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet

The ID of second Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done

TP 1The ID of first Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet

The ID of first Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done

AIR PRESS FL Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)Air pressure of front LH

tire

AIR PRESS FR Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)Air pressure of front RH

tire

AIR PRESS RR Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)Air pressure of rear RH

tire

AIR PRESS RL Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)Air pressure of rear LH

tire

ID REGST FL1ID of front LH tire transmitter is registered Done

ID of front LH tire transmitter is not registered Yet

ID REGST FR1ID of front RH tire transmitter is registered Done

ID of front RH tire transmitter is not registered Yet

ID REGST RR1ID of rear RH tire transmitter is registered Done

ID of rear RH tire transmitter is not registered Yet

ID REGST RL1ID of rear LH tire transmitter is registered Done

ID of rear LH tire transmitter is not registered Yet

WARNING LAMPTire pressure indicator OFF Off

Tire pressure indicator ON On

BUZZERTire pressure warning alarm is not sounding Off

Tire pressure warning alarm is sounding On




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

JPMIA0062ZZ



Description

ConditionValue

(Approx.)Signal nameInput/ Output+ –

1(W)

Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage

2(Y)

GroundP/W power supply (BAT)

Output Ignition switch OFF 12 V

3(O)

GroundP/W power supply (RAP)

Output Ignition switch ON 12 V

4(LG)

GroundInterior room lamp power supply

Output

Interior room lamp battery saver is activated.(Cuts the interior room lamp power supply)

0 V

Interior room lamp battery saver is not acti-vated.(Outputs the interior room lamp power sup-ply)

12 V

5(P)

GroundPassenger door UN-LOCK

OutputPassenger door

UNLOCK (Actuator is acti-vated)

12 V

Other than UNLOCK (Ac-tuator is not activated)

0 V

7(SB)

Ground Step lamp Output Step lampON 0 V

OFF 12 V

8(V)

GroundAll doors, fuel lid LOCK

OutputAll doors, fuel lid

LOCK(Actuator is activated)

12 V

Other than LOCK(Actuator is not activated)

0 V

9(G)

GroundDriver door, fuel lid UNLOCK

OutputDriver door, fuel lid

UNLOCK(Actuator is activated)

12 V

Other than UNLOCK(Actuator is not activated)

0 V

11(R)

Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage

13(B)

Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON 0 V

14(W)

GroundPush-button ignition switch illumination ground

Output Tail lamp

OFF 0 V

ON

NOTE:When the illumination brighten-

ing/dimming level is in the neutral position.

15(O)

Ground ACC indicator lamp Output Ignition switch

OFF (LOCK indicator is not illuminated)

Battery voltage

ACC 0 V

JSNIA0010GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

17(W)

GroundTurn signal RH (Front)

OutputIgnition switch ON

Turn signal switch OFF 0 V

Turn signal switch RH

6.5 V

18(O)

Ground Turn signal LH (Front) OutputIgnition switch ON


Turn signal switch LH

6.5 V

19(V)

GroundRoom lamp timer control

OutputInterior room lamp

OFF 12 V

ON 0 V

20(V)

Ground Turn signal RH (Rear) OutputIgnition switch ON



6.5 V

23(L)

Ground Trunk lid open Output Trunk lid

OPEN(Trunk lid opener actuator is activated)

12 V

Other than OPEN(Trunk lid opener actuator is not activated)

0 V

25(Y)

Ground Turn signal LH (Rear) OutputIgnition switch ON



6.5 V

30(P)

Ground Trunk room lamp OutputTrunk room lamp

ON 0 V

OFF 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


PKID0926E

PKID0926E

PKID0926E

PKID0926E


34(SB)

GroundTrunk room antenna (−)

OutputIgnition switch OFF

When Intelligent Key is in the passenger compart-ment

When Intelligent Key is not in the passenger compart-ment

35(V)

GroundTrunk room antenna (+)




38(B)

GroundRear bumper anten-na (−)

Output

When the trunk lid opener re-quest switch is operated with ignition switch OFF

When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area

When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

39(W)

GroundRear bumper anten-na (+)

Output

When the trunk lid opener re-quest switch is operated with ignition switch OFF



47(Y)

GroundIgnition relay (IPDM E/R) control

Output Ignition switchOFF or ACC 12 V

ON 0 V

50(R)

GroundTrunk room lamp switch

InputTrunk room lamp switch

OFF (Trunk lid is closed)

11.8 V

ON (Trunk lid is opened) 0 V

52(SB)

Ground Starter relay control Output

Ignition switch ON (A/T mod-els)

When selector lever is in P or N position

12 V

When selector lever is not in P or N position

0 V

Ignition switch ON (M/T mod-els)

When the clutch pedal is depressed

Battery voltage

When the clutch pedal is not depressed

0 V

61(SB)

GroundTrunk lid opener re-quest switch

InputTrunk lid open-er request switch

ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

64(L)

GroundIntelligent Key warn-ing buzzer (Engine room)

OutputIntelligent Key warning buzzer (Engine room)

Sounding 0 V

Not sounding 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JPMIA0011GB

JPMIA0016GB


67(GR)

GroundTrunk lid opener switch

InputTrunk lid open-er switch

Pressed 0 V

Not pressed

11.8 V

72(R)

GroundRoom antenna 2 (−) (Center console)




73(G)

GroundRoom antenna 2 (+) (Center console)





Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0011GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

74(SB)

GroundPassenger door an-tenna (−)

Output

When the pas-senger door re-quest switch is operated with ignition switch OFF



75(BR)

GroundPassenger door an-tenna (+)

Output

When the pas-senger door re-quest switch is operated with ignition switch OFF



76(V)

GroundDriver door antenna (−)

Output

When the driv-er door request switch is oper-ated with igni-tion switch OFF




Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


77(LG)

GroundDriver door antenna (+)

Output

When the driv-er door request switch is oper-ated with igni-tion switch OFF



78(Y)

GroundRoom antenna 1 (−) (Instrument panel)




79(BR)

GroundRoom antenna 1 (+) (Instrument panel)





Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

80(GR)

GroundNATS antenna amp (Built in key slot)

Input/Output

During waitingIgnition switch is pressed while inserting the Intelli-gent Key into the key slot.

Just after pressing ignition switch. Pointer of tester should

move.

81(W)

GroundNATS antenna amp (Built in key slot)

Input/Output

During waitingIgnition switch is pressed while inserting the Intelli-gent Key into the key slot.

Just after pressing ignition switch. Pointer of tester should

move.

82(R)

GroundIgnition relay [Fuse block (J/B)] control


ON 12 V

83(Y)

GroundRemote keyless entry receiver communica-tion

Input/Output

During waiting

When operating either button on the Intelli-gent Key

87(Y)

GroundCombination switch INPUT 5

InputCombination switch

All switches OFF(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.4 V

Front fog lamp switch ON(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V

Any of the conditions be-low with all switches OFF• Wiper intermittent dial 1• Wiper intermittent dial 2• Wiper intermittent dial 6• Wiper intermittent dial 7

1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0064GB

JMKIA0065GB

JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0040GB


88(O)




1.4 V

Lighting switch HI(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V

Lighting switch 2ND(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V

Any of the conditions be-low with all switches OFF• Wiper intermittent dial 1• Wiper intermittent dial 2• Wiper intermittent dial 3

1.3 V

89(BR)

GroundPush-button ignition switch (Push switch)

InputPush-button ig-nition switch (push switch)

Pressed 0 V

Not pressed Battery voltage

90(P)

Ground CAN-LInput/ Output

— —

91(L)

Ground CAN-HInput/ Output

— —

92(LG)

Ground Key slot illumination OutputKey slot illumi-nation

OFF 0 V

Blinking

6.5 V

ON 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0040GB

JPMIA0015GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

93(Y)

Ground ON indicator lamp Output Ignition switch

OFF (LOCK indicator is not illuminated)

Battery voltage

ON 0 V

95(O)

Ground ACC relay control Output Ignition switchOFF 0 V

ACC or ON 12 V

96(GR)

GroundA/T shift selector (De-tention switch) power supply

Output — 12 V

97(L)

GroundSteering lock condi-tion No. 1

Input Steering lockLOCK status 0 V

UNLOCK status 12 V

98(P)

GroundSteering lock condi-tion No. 2

Input Steering lockLOCK status 12 V

UNLOCK status 0 V

99(R)

Ground

Selector lever P posi-tion switch

Input

Selector leverP position 0 V

Any position other than P 12 V

ASCD clutch switch (M/T models without ICC)

ASCD clutch switch

OFF (Clutch pedal is de-pressed)

0 V

ON (Clutch pedal is not depressed)

12 V

ICC clutch switch (M/T models with ICC)

ICC clutch switch

OFF (Clutch pedal is de-pressed)

0 V

ON (Clutch pedal is not depressed)

12 V

100(Y)

GroundPassenger door re-quest switch

InputPassenger door request switch

ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

101(P)

GroundDriver door request switch

InputDriver door re-quest switch

ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

102(O)

GroundBlower fan motor re-lay control


ON 12 V

103(LG)

GroundRemote keyless entry receiver power sup-ply

Output Ignition switch OFF 12 V

106(W)

GroundSteering lock unit power supply


ON 0 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0016GB

JPMIA0016GB


107(LG)


Input

Combination switch(Wiper intermit-tent dial 4)

All switches OFF

1.4 V


1.3 V


1.3 V

Front wiper switch LO

1.3 V

Front washer switch ON

1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0039GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

108(R)




1.4 V

Lighting switch AUTO(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V

Lighting switch 1ST(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V


1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0039GB


109(W)


Input


All switches OFF

1.4 V

Lighting switch PASS

1.3 V

Lighting switch 2ND

1.3 V

Front wiper switch INT

1.3 V

Front wiper switch HI

1.3 V

110(G)

Ground Hazard switch Input Hazard switch

ON 0 V

OFF

1.1 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0040GB

JPMIA0012GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

111(Y)

GroundSteering lock unit communication

Input/Output

Steering lock

LOCK status 12 V

LOCK or UNLOCK

For 15 seconds after UN-LOCK

12 V

15 seconds or later after UNLOCK

0 V

113(O)

Ground Optical sensor InputIgnition switch ON

When bright outside of the vehicle

Close to 5 V

When dark outside of the vehicle

Close to 0 V

114(R)

GroundClutch interlock switch

InputClutch interlock switch

OFF (Clutch pedal is not depressed)

0 V

ON (Clutch pedal is de-pressed)

Battery voltage

116(SB)

Ground Stop lamp switch 1 Input — Battery voltage

118(BR)

Ground

Stop lamp switch 2 (Without ICC)

Input

Stop lamp switch

OFF (Brake pedal is not depressed)

0 V

ON (Brake pedal is de-pressed)

Battery voltage

Stop lamp switch 2 (With ICC)

Stop lamp switch OFF (Brake pedal is not depressed) and ICC brake hold relay OFF

0 V

Stop lamp switch ON (Brake pedal is de-pressed) or ICC brake hold relay ON

Battery voltage

119(SB)

GroundDriver side door lock assembly (Unlock sensor)

Input Driver door

LOCK status(Unlock sensor switch OFF)

1.1 V

UNLOCK status(Unlock switch sensor ON)

0 V

121(SB)

Ground Key slot switch Input

When the Intelligent Key is inserted into key slot

12 V

When the Intelligent Key is not inserted into key slot

0 V

123(W)

Ground IGN feedback Input Ignition switchOFF or ACC 0 V

ON Battery voltage


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0066GB

JPMIA0012GB


124(LG)

GroundPassenger door switch

InputPassenger door switch

OFF (Door close)

11.8 V

ON (Door open) 0 V

129(O)

GroundTrunk lid opener can-cel switch

InputTrunk lid open-er cancel switch

CANCEL

1.1 V

ON 0 V

132(V)

GroundPower window switch communication

Input/Output

Ignition switch ON

10.2 V

Ignition switch OFF or ACC 12 V

133(L)

GroundPush-button ignition switch illumination

OutputPush-button ig-nition switch il-lumination

ON (Tail lamps OFF) 9.5 V

ON (Tail lamps ON)

NOTE:The pulse width of this wave is

varied by the illumination bright-ening/dimming level.

OFF 0 V

134(LG)

Ground LOCK indicator lamp OutputLOCK indicator lamp

OFF Battery voltage

ON 0 V

137(O)

GroundReceiver and sensor ground

Input Ignition switch ON 0 V

138(V)

GroundReceiver and sensor power supply

Output Ignition switchOFF 0 V

ACC or ON 5.0 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0011GB

JPMIA0012GB

JPMIA0013GB

JPMIA0159GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

139(L)

GroundTire pressure receiv-er communication

Input/Output

Ignition switch ON

Standby state

When receiving the signal from the transmitter

140(GR)

GroundSelector lever P/N position (A/T models)

Input Selector leverP or N position 12 V

Except P and N positions 0 V

141(R)

Ground Security indicator OutputSecurity indica-tor

ON 0 V

Blinking

11.3 V

OFF 12 V

142(BR)

GroundCombination switch OUTPUT 5

Output


All switches OFF 0 V

Lighting switch 1ST

10.7 V

Lighting switch HI

Lighting switch 2ND


143(V)


OutputCombination switch


0 V

Front wiper switch HI(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

10.7 V

Any of the conditions be-low with all switches OFF• Wiper intermittent dial 1• Wiper intermittent dial 2• Wiper intermittent dial 3• Wiper intermittent dial 6• Wiper intermittent dial 7


Description

ConditionValue


OCC3881D

OCC3880D

JPMIA0014GB

JPMIA0031GB

JPMIA0032GB


144(G)


OutputCombination switch


0 V

Front washer switch ON(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

10.7 V


145(L)


Output



Front wiper switch INT

10.7 V

Front wiper switch LO

Lighting switch AUTO

146(SB)


Output



Front fog lamp switch ON

10.7 V

Lighting switch 2ND

Lighting switch PASS


149(W)

GroundTire pressure warning check switch

Input — 12 V

150(R)

Ground Driver door switch InputDriver door switch

OFF (Door close)

11.8 V

ON (Door open) 0 V

151(G)

GroundRear window defog-ger relay control

OutputRear window defogger

Active 0 V

Not activated Battery voltage


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0033GB

JPMIA0034GB

JPMIA0035GB

JPMIA0011GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

Wiring Diagram - BCM - INFOID:0000000004610461

JCMWM3046GB


JCMWM3047GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

JCMWM3048GB


JCMWM3049GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

JCMWM3050GB


Fail-safe INFOID:0000000004610462

FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTCBCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected.

JCMWM3051GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe Cancellation

B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2195: ANTI SCANNING Inhibit engine cranking Ignition switch ON → OFF

B2557: VEHICLE SPEED Inhibit steering lockWhen normal vehicle speed signals are received from ABS actua-tor and electric unit (control unit) for 500 ms

B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status be-comes consistent• Starter control relay signal• Starter relay status signal

B2601: SHIFT POSITION Inhibit steering lock

500 ms after the following signal reception status becomes consis-tent• Selector lever P position switch signal• P range signal (CAN)

B2602: SHIFT POSITION Inhibit steering lock

5 seconds after the following BCM recognition conditions are ful-filled• Ignition switch is in the ON position• Selector lever P position switch signal: Except P position (battery

voltage)• Vehicle speed: 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more

B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS Inhibit steering lock

500 ms after the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled• Ignition switch is in the ON position• Selector lever P position switch signal: Except P position (battery

voltage)• Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V)

B2604: PNP SW Inhibit steering lock

500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled• Status 1- Ignition switch is in the ON position- Selector lever P/N position signal: P and N position (battery volt-

age)- P range signal or N range signal (CAN): ON• Status 2- Ignition switch is in the ON position- Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V)- P range signal and N range signal (CAN): OFF

B2605: PNP SW Inhibit steering lock

500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled• Status 1- Ignition switch is in the ON position- Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V)- Interlock/PNP switch signal (CAN): OFF• Status 2- Ignition switch is in the ON position- Selector lever P/N position signal: P or N position (battery volt-

age)- PNP switch signal (CAN): ON

B2606: S/L RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status be-comes consistent• Steering lock relay signal (Request signal)• Steering lock relay signal (Condition signal)


HIGH FLASHER OPERATIONBCM detects the turn signal lamp circuit status by the current value.BCM increases the turn signal lamp blinking speed if the bulb or harness open is detected with the turn signallamp operating.NOTE:The blinking speed is normal while activating the hazard warning lamp.

DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000004610463

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following prioritychart.

B2607: S/L RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status has becomes consistent• Steering lock relay signal (Request signal)• Steering lock relay signal (Condition signal)

B2608: STARTER RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent• Starter motor relay control signal• Starter relay status signal (CAN)

B2609: S/L STATUS• Inhibit engine cranking• Inhibit steering lock

When the following steering lock conditions agree• BCM steering lock control status• Steering lock condition No. 1 signal status• Steering lock condition No. 2 signal status

B260A: IGNITION RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following conditions are fulfilled• IGN relay (IPDM E/R) control signal: OFF (Battery voltage)• Ignition ON signal (CAN to IPDM E/R): OFF (Request signal)• Ignition ON signal (CAN from IPDM E/R): OFF (Condition signal)

B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOSTMaintains the power supply position attained at the time of DTC detection

When any of the following conditions are fulfilled• Power position changes to ACC• Receives engine status signal (CAN)

B2612: S/L STATUS• Inhibit engine cranking• Inhibit steering lock

When any of the following conditions are fulfilled• Steering lock unit status signal (CAN) is received normally• The BCM steering lock control status matches the steering lock

status recognized by the steering lock unit status signal (CAN from IPDM E/R)

B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC Inhibit engine cranking1 second after the starter motor relay control inside BCM becomes normal

B2618: BCM Inhibit engine cranking1 second after the ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control inside BCM be-comes normal

B2619: BCM Inhibit engine cranking1 second after the steering lock unit power supply output control in-side BCM becomes normal

B261E: VEHICLE TYPE Inhibit engine cranking BCM initialization

B26E8: CLUTCH SW Inhibit engine cranking

When any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled• Status 1- Clutch switch signal (CAN from ECM): ON- Clutch interlock switch signal: OFF (0 V)• Status 2- Clutch switch signal (CAN from ECM): OFF- Clutch interlock switch signal: ON (Battery voltage)

B26E9: S/L STATUS• Inhibit engine cranking• Inhibit steering lock

When BCM transmits the LOCK request signal to steering lock unit, and receives LOCK response signal from steering lock unit, the fol-lowing conditions are fulfilled• Steering condition No. 1 signal: LOCK (0 V)• Steering condition No. 2 signal: LOCK (Battery voltage)

Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe Cancellation



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

Priority DTC

1 B2562: LOW VOLTAGE

2• U1000: CAN COMM• U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN)

3

• B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP• B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY• B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM• B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM• B2195: ANTI SCANNING

4

• B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L• B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM• B2553: IGNITION RELAY• B2555: STOP LAMP • B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW• B2557: VEHICLE SPEED• B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY• B2601: SHIFT POSITION• B2602: SHIFT POSITION• B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS• B2604: PNP SW• B2605: PNP SW• B2606: S/L RELAY• B2607: S/L RELAY• B2608: STARTER RELAY• B2609: S/L STATUS• B260A: IGNITION RELAY• B260B: STEERING LOCK UNIT• B260C: STEERING LOCK UNIT• B260D: STEERING LOCK UNIT• B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST• B2612: S/L STATUS• B2614: ACC RELAY CIRC• B2615: BLOWER RELAY CIRC• B2616: IGN RELAY CIRC• B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC• B2618: BCM• B2619: BCM• B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW• B261E: VEHICLE TYPE• B26E8: CLUTCH SW• B26E9: S/L STATUS• B26EA: KEY REGISTRATION• C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR• U0415: VEHICLE SPEED SIG


DTC Index INFOID:0000000004610464

NOTE:The details of time display are as follows.• CRNT: A malfunction is detected now.• PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past.IGN counter is displayed on Freeze Frame Data. For details of Freeze Frame Data, refer to BCS-14, "COM-MON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)".

5

• C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL• C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR• C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR• C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL• C1708: [NO DATA] FL• C1709: [NO DATA] FR• C1710: [NO DATA] RR• C1711: [NO DATA] RL• C1712: [CHECKSUM ERR] FL• C1713: [CHECKSUM ERR] FR• C1714: [CHECKSUM ERR] RR• C1715: [CHECKSUM ERR] RL• C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL• C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR• C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR• C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL• C1720: [CODE ERR] FL• C1721: [CODE ERR] FR• C1722: [CODE ERR] RR• C1723: [CODE ERR] RL• C1724: [BATT VOLT LOW] FL• C1725: [BATT VOLT LOW] FR• C1726: [BATT VOLT LOW] RR• C1727: [BATT VOLT LOW] RL• C1734: CONTROL UNIT

6• B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA • B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA • B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA

Priority DTC

CONSULT display Fail-safe

Freeze Frame Data•Vehicle Speed•Odo/Trip Meter

•Vehicle condition

Intelligent Key warning lamp ON

Tire pressure monitor warning

lamp ON

Refer-ence page

No DTC is detected.further testingmay be required.

— — — — —

U1000: CAN COMM — — — — BCS-35

U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN) — — — — BCS-36

U0415: VEHICLE SPEED SIG — — — — BCS-37

B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L × × — — SEC-55

B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM × × — — SEC-56

B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP × — — — SEC-47

B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY × — — — SEC-50

B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM × — — — SEC-51

B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM × — — — SEC-53

B2195: ANTI SCANNING × — — — SEC-54

B2553: IGNITION RELAY — × — — PCS-48

B2555: STOP LAMP — × — — SEC-59



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW — × × — SEC-61

B2557: VEHICLE SPEED × × × — SEC-63

B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY × × × — SEC-64

B2562: LOW VOLTAGE — × — — BCS-38

B2601: SHIFT POSITION × × × — SEC-65

B2602: SHIFT POSITION × × × — SEC-68

B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS × × × — SEC-70

B2604: PNP SW × × × — SEC-73

B2605: PNP SW × × × — SEC-75

B2606: S/L RELAY × × × — SEC-77

B2607: S/L RELAY × × × — SEC-78

B2608: STARTER RELAY × × × — SEC-80

B2609: S/L STATUS × × × — SEC-82

B260A: IGNITION RELAY × × × — PCS-50

B260B: STEERING LOCK UNIT — × × — SEC-86

B260C: STEERING LOCK UNIT — × × — SEC-87

B260D: STEERING LOCK UNIT — × × — SEC-88

B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST × × × — SEC-89

B2612: S/L STATUS × × × — SEC-94

B2614: ACC RELAY CIRC — × × — PCS-52

B2615: BLOWER RELAY CIRC — × × — PCS-54

B2616: IGN RELAY CIRC — × × — PCS-56

B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC × × × — SEC-98

B2618: BCM × × × — PCS-58

B2619: BCM × × × — SEC-100

B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW — × × — PCS-59

B261E: VEHICLE TYPE × × × (Turn ON for 15 seconds)

— SEC-101

B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA — × — — DLK-55



B26E8: CLUTCH SW × × × — SEC-90

B26E9: S/L STATUS × × × (Turn ON for 15 seconds)

— SEC-92

B26EA: KEY REGISTRATION — × × (Turn ON for 15 seconds)

— SEC-93

C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL — — — ×

WT-17C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR — — — ×

C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR — — — ×

C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL — — — ×






lamp ON

Refer-ence page


C1708: [NO DATA] FL — — — ×

WT-19C1709: [NO DATA] FR — — — ×

C1710: [NO DATA] RR — — — ×

C1711: [NO DATA] RL — — — ×

C1712: [CHECKSUM ERR] FL — — — ×

WT-21C1713: [CHECKSUM ERR] FR — — — ×

C1714: [CHECKSUM ERR] RR — — — ×

C1715: [CHECKSUM ERR] RL — — — ×

C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL — — — ×

WT-24C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR — — — ×

C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR — — — ×

C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL — — — ×

C1720: [CODE ERR] FL — — — ×

WT-26C1721: [CODE ERR] FR — — — ×

C1722: [CODE ERR] RR — — — ×

C1723: [CODE ERR] RL — — — ×

C1724: [BATT VOLT LOW] FL — — — ×

WT-29C1725: [BATT VOLT LOW] FR — — — ×

C1726: [BATT VOLT LOW] RR — — — ×

C1727: [BATT VOLT LOW] RL — — — ×

C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR — — — × WT-32

C1734: CONTROL UNIT — — — × WT-33






lamp ON

Refer-ence page


REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISREAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE


1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power supply and ground circuit.Refer to DEF-10, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH

Check rear window defogger switch.Refer to DEF-11, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check rear window defogger relay. Refer to DEF-12, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check rear window defogger.Refer to DEF-14, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

5.CONFIRM THE OPERATION

Confirm the operation again.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> GO TO 1.


REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DO NOT OPER-ATE.


REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DO NOTOPERATE.


1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power supply and ground circuit.Refer to DEF-10, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH

Check rear window defogger switch.Refer to DEF-11, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check rear window defogger relay. Refer to DEF-12, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BUT BOTH DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGERS OPERATE.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BUT BOTH DOORMIRROR DEFOGGERS OPERATE.



Check rear window defogger.Refer to DEF-14, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Confirm the operation againIs the inspection result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> GO TO 1.


DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATEBOTH SIDES

BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004249139

1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER

Check door mirror defogger.Refer to DEF-17, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



DRIVER SIDE

DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004249140

1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER

Check driver side door mirror defogger.Refer to DEF-19, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



PASSENGER SIDE

PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004249141

1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER.

Check passenger side door mirror defogger.Refer to DEF-21, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




ON IS NOT DISPLAYED WHEN PRESSING REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH BUT IT IS OPERATED

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

ON IS NOT DISPLAYED WHEN PRESSING REAR WINDOW DEFOGGERSWITCH BUT IT IS OPERATED


1.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT FUNCTION

Check that the AV control unit is operating normally.Base audio without navigation refer to AV-10, "Work Flow".Bose audio without navigation refer to AV-125, "Work Flow".Bose audio with navigation refer to AV-372, "Work Flow".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE


1.CHECK MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH (REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH)

Check rear window defogger operate.

YES >> Replace multifunction switch (rear window defogger switch). Refer to AV-119, "Removal andInstallation"

NO >> Check rear window defogger system. Refer to DEF-3, "Work Flow"


PRECAUTIONS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

D













FILAMENT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONFILAMENT

Inspection and Repair INFOID:0000000004249145

INSPECTION1. When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the neg-

ative probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your finger.

2. Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion ofeach filament.

3. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or batteryvoltage.

4. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along fil-ament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes thepoint.

REPAIR

REPAIR EQUIPMENT• Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent)

SEL122R

SEL263

SEL265


FILAMENT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

EF

N

O

P


D

• Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long• Drawing pen• Heat gun• Alcohol• Cloth

REPAIRING PROCEDURE

1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with acloth dampened in alcohol.

2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip ofdrawing pen.Shake silver composition container before use.

3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silvercomposition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existingheat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break.

4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for conti-nuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silvercomposition is deposited.Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.

5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired areafor approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum dis-tance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area andhot air outlet.If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24hours.

PIIA0215E

SEL012D

SEL013D


CONDENSER
CONDENSER


Refer toINT-14, "Exploded View"


REMOVAL1. Remove the rear seat cushion and the rear seatback.

Refer to SE-192, "Removal and Installation"2. Remove the rear kickplate, rear wheel well garnish and the rear pillar finisher.

Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation"3. Remove bolt (A), and then remove condenser (1) from the vehi-

cle body.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.

JMLIA0080ZZ


infiniti g37-09-coupe2

Documents